Home
        Siemens S7-300 User's Manual
         Contents
1.                                                                                                            PG    TeleService SUb    dapt upne  satan  e g  PROFIBUS DP       Modem Modem  Subnet 1  e g  MPI   Configuration in STEP 7 e g  CPU 31xC 2DP_ e g  CPU 31xC 2 DP  DP master DP slave  PG                                                                                                                                                                                                              Subnet 2  e g  PROFIBUS DP           Subnet 1  e g  MPI     CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  3 14 Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05    Communication  3 2 Communication services       Reference    e onconfiguring in STEP 7 is found in the Configuring Hardware and Connections in  STEP 7 manual    e of abasic nature is contained in the Communication with SIMATIC Manual     on the TeleService adapter can be found on the Internet URL     http   www ad  Seat sei Ue t  In the Manual Search section  you can enter the    search term A o download the documentation           e on SFCs are found in the  nstruction list  for more details refer to the STEP 7 Online Help  or to the System and Standard Functions Reference Manual     e on communication are found in the Communication with SIMATIC Manual     3 2 8 PtP communication    Properties    PtP communication enables you to exchange data via serial port  PtP communication can be  used to interconnect automation devices  computers or commu
2.                                                                                             ee ee  aa X11  gt   1   Standard Positioning 1     21  Standard DI   Interrupt input  V 20 DI 2 0      22 X X  Al  Ch0   I 3     PEWx 0  DI 2 1     23 X X  Cc 40 Dl 2 2      24 X xX  V 50 DI 2 3      25 X X  Al Ch1   1 6    PEWx 2  DI 2 4      26 x X  C 7  DI 2 5      27 X X  V 8 o DI 2 6      28 x X  Al Ch2     9 D  PEWx 4  Dl 2 7     29 xX X  C 10    4M    30  Vv 11 O O31  Al Ch3     12     PEWx 6    32  c 13       33  14       34  PT 100  Ch4  15 g PEWX 8 E  V  Control 16       36     AO  Ch0  H pi T o PAW x 0 337  V 18       38  AO  Ch1  FA qg o PAWx 2 36  20     Mana    40  1  CPU 314C 2 only  Block diagram of integrated digital analog I O of CPUs 313C 314C 2  Al AO 8D   1 21  o       o  2 22  O Al ga  eA 2 i 23   4  4   CHO I   24    Alof 5  V Al Wy  Zee  A    8 26 e  7 CH1 5   27    m8   E   28  O Al 5  Z_  oto      2 5 i cA o  10   CH2   30  Al2 4M  11 31  V Al T  L   12 32   13   CH3 33     o  a Al3  44 34   pag 15  A Controller 35  a PT100 o  16 36  RT V 17  lt  U  AO i      lt  I  CHO eo  to 18 z 38   AO1 VI 419 uy A9 39  el  lt  I  CH1 25  Al 20 40     o  Mana             CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  6 32 Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05    Technical data of CPU 31xC  6 6 Technical data of the integrated I O       Simultaneous usage of technological functions and standard I O    Technological functions and standard I O can be used simultaneously with appropr
3.                                                    TER ED BE E E E S D E A E C E S E E a  CEECEE ERE                                                          The figures show the following CPU elements    1  Status and error displays    2  Slot for the Micro Memory Card  MMC   incl  the ejector   3  Connections of the integrated 1 O     4  Power supply connection    5  2  Interface X2  PtP or DP     6  1  Interface X1  MPI     7  Mode selector switch                CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05 2 1    Operating and display elements       2 1 Operating and display elements  CPU 31xC    The figure below illustrates the integrated digital and analog I Os of the CPU with open front    covers     X11 X12                                                                                     0 0 0              SES E SO EEEE EE ps ER ER ES G A LE  al al E       Ex  Q                           0  ee N  eaa                OOOOOO ODA T  eh a a Ta i a DP  ea al                                        Petter ttt  erd prrrrs                                           Figure 2 1 Integrated I Os of CPU 31xC  CPU 314C 2 PtP  for example        The figure shows     1     the following integrated I Os  Analog I Os        2     each with 8 digital inputs           3           each with 8 digital outputs       Slot for the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card  MMC     A SIMATIC micro memory card  MMC  is used as memory module  You can use MMCs as  load memory and a
4.                       Consistent data 64 bytes   5 compatible communication Yes  via CP and loadable FCs   Number of connections Max  8  can be used for  e PG communication Max  7      Reserved  default  1      Configurable from 1 to 7  e OP communication Max  7      Reserved  default  1      Configurable from 1 to 7  e S7 based communication Max  4      Reserved  default  4      Configurable from 0 to 4  Routing No Max  4  Interfaces CPU 313C 2 PtP CPU 313C 2 DP          1st interface       Type of interface    Integrated RS485 interface                            Physics RS 485  electrically isolated No   Interface power supply  15 to 30 VDC  Max  200 mA  Functionality   e MPI Yes   e PROFIBUS DP No   e Point to point communication No             CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05    6 17    Technical data of CPU 31xC       6 4 CPU 313C 2 PtP and CPU 313C 2 DP       Technical data       CPU 313C 2 PtP CPU 313C 2 DP                         MPI  Services  e PG OP communication Yes  e Routing No Yes  e Global data communication Yes  e S7 basic communication Yes  e S7 communication e      As server e Yes      As client e No  but via CP and loadable FBs        Type of interface    Integrated RS422 RS485 interface    Integrated RS485 interface                                                                      Physics RS 422 485 RS 485  electrically isolated Yes Yes  Interface power supply  15 to 30 VDC  No Max  200 mA  Number of connec
5.                  Data blocks  e Number 1023   DB 1 to DB 1023   e Length 16 KB  Local data capacity Max  1024 bytes per task 510 per block  Blocks  Total 1024  DBs  FCs  FBs   The maximum number of blocks that can be  loaded may be reduced if you are using another  MMC   OBs See the Instruction List  e Length 16 KB  Nesting depth  e Per priority class 8  e additional within an error OB 4  FBs See the Instruction List  e Number 2048   FB 0 to FB 2047   e Length 16 KB  FCs See the Instruction List  e Number 2048   FC 0 to FC 2047   e Length 16 KB       Address areas  I O        Total I O address area    max  2048 bytes 2048 bytes   can be freely addressed                                   Distributed Max  2000  I O process image 128 128  Digital channels Max  16384  of those local Max  1024  Analog channels Max  1024  of those local Max  256  Assembly   Racks Max  4  Modules per rack 8       Number of DP masters       e Integrated          e viaCP             CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05    Technical data of CPU 31x                                                                                                       7 4 CPU 315 2 DP  Technical data  Number of function modules and communication  processors you can operate  e FM Max  8  e CP  PtP  Max  8  e CP  LAN  Max  10  Time of day  Real time clock Yes  HW clock   e Buffered Yes  e Buffered period Typically 6 weeks  at an ambient temperature of  104   F   e Behavior of the clo
6.              Inrush current Typically 2 5 A  Power consumption  nominal value  0 6 A   12t 0 5 A s  External fusing of power supply lines min  2 A   recommended    Power loss Typically 2 5 W          CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05    7 7    Technical data of CPU 31x       7 3 CPU 314    7 3 CPU 314    Technical data for the CPU 314    Table 7 4 Technical data for the CPU 314       Technical data  CPU and version       Order number    6ES7314 1AF10 OABO       e Hardware version    01       e Firmware version    V 2 0 0       e Associated programming package    STEP 7 as of V5 1   SP 4                Memory   RAM   e Integrated 48 KB  e Expandable No       Load memory    Plugged in with MMC  max  8 MB        Data storage life on the MMC   following final programming     At least 10 years       Buffering    Guaranteed by MMC  maintenance free        Execution times       Processing times of                      e Bit operations Min  0 1 us  e Word instructions Min  0 2 us  e Fixed point arithmetic Min  2 0 us  e Floating point arithmetic Min  6 us  Timers counters and their retentivity   S7 counters 256       e Retentive memory    Configurable                      e Default from CO to C7   e Counting range 0 to 999   IEC Counters Yes   e Type SFB   e Number unlimited  limited only by RAM size   S7 timers 256       e Retentive memory    Configurable       e Default    Not retentive       e Timer range    10 ms to 9990 s              
7.          Memory object Operating state transition  POWER ON   STOP  gt  CPU memory  POWER OFF RUN reset  User program data  load memory  X X X  e Retentive behavior of DBs for CPUs  with firmware  lt  V2 1 0 x x _  e Retentive behavior of DBs for CPUs Can be set in the properties of the DBs     with firmware  gt   V2 1 0 in STEP 7 V5 2   SP1 or higher   Flag bits  timers and counters configured as   X X    retentive data  Diagnostics buffers  operating hour X X X  counters  MPI address  transmission rate X X X   or also DP address  transmission rate of  the MPI DP interface of CPU 315 2 PN DP  and CPU 317  if these are configured as  DP nodes               x   retentive        not retentive    Retentive behavior of a DB for CPUs with firmware  lt  V2 1 0  For these CPUs  the contents of the DBs are always retentive at POWER ON OFF or STOP     RUN     CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05    Memory concept       4 1 Memory areas and retentivity    Retentive behavior of a DB for CPUs with firmware  gt   V2 1 0    For these CPUs you can specify in STEP 7  beginning with version 5 2   SP 1   or at SFC 82  CREA_DBL  parameter ATTRIB   gt  NON_RETAIN bit   whether a DB at POWER ON OFF or  RUN STOP    e keeps the actual values  retentive DB   or    e accepts the initial values from load memory  non retentive DB     Table 4 3 Retentive behavior of DBs for CPUs with firmware  gt   V2 1 0       At POWER ON OFF or restart  warm start  of the CPU  
8.        CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05    6 47    Technical data of CPU 31xC       6 6 Technical data of the integrated I O       Technical data       CPU 312C CPU 313C CPU 313C 2    CPU 314C 2                         Data for the selection of an encoder for CPU 312C CPU 313C CPU 313C 2 CPU 314C 2  standard DI   Input voltage   e Rated value 24 VDC   e For signal  1  15 V to 30 V   e For signal  0   3Vto5V   Input current   e For signal  1  Typically 9 mA       Delay of standard inputs       e Configurable    Yes  0 1 0 5 3 15 ms     You can reconfigure the input delay of the standard inputs during program  runtime  Please note that your newly set filter time may only take effect  after the previously set filter time has expired        e Rated value    3 ms       For using technological functions      Minimum pulse width  minimum pause  between pulses at maximum counting  frequency     48 us 16 us 16 us 8 US                Input characteristics curve    to IEC 1131  type 1       Connection of 2 wire BEROs    Possible          e Permitted quiescent current          Max  1 5 mA       6 6 7 Digital outputs    Introduction    This chapter contains the specifications for the digital outputs of CPUs 31xC     The table includes the following CPUs   e under CPU 313C 2  the CPU 313C 2 DP and CPU 313C 2 PtP  e under CPU 314C 2  the CPU 314C 2 DP and CPU 314C 2 PtP    Fast digital outputs    Technological functions use fast digital outputs  
9.        Technical data    Number of function modules and communication  processors you can operate                e FM Max  8  e CP  PtP  Max  8  e CP  LAN  Max  10  Time of day       Real time clock    Yes  HW clock        e Buffered    Yes       e Buffered period    Typically 6 weeks  at an ambient temperature of  104   F        e Behavior of the clock on expiration of the  buffered period    The clock keeps running  continuing at the time   of day it had when power was switched off        e Accuracy    Deviation per day   lt  10s       Operating hours counter    1             e Number 0  e Value range 2 31 hours    if SFC 101 is used   e Granularity 1 hour       e Retentive    yes  must be manually restarted after every  restart             Clock synchronization Yes  e Inthe PLC Master  e On MPI Master slave       S7 signaling functions       Number of stations that can log in for signaling  functions  e g  OS     12     depends on the number of connections  configured for PG   OP and S7 basic  communication                 Process diagnostics messages Yes   e Simultaneously enabled interrupt S blocks Max  40  Testing and commissioning functions   Status control variables Yes       e Variables    Inputs  outputs  memory bits  DBs  timers   counters                                     e Number of variables 30      Of those as status variable 30      Of those as control variable 14  Forcing Yes  e Variables Inputs Outputs  e Number of variables Max  10  Block status Yes  Sing
10.       Routing PG functions   only for CPUs with DP PN interface     The CPUs provide a certain number of connection resources for routing   These connections are available in addition to the connection resources   The subsection below shows the number of connection resources        Global data communication  Point to point communication    These communication services do not use connection resources        Open communication by means of TCP IP    This communication service does not occupy any connection resources   Eight connections are available in parallel           SNMP       This communication service does not occupy any connection resources        CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05    3 29       Communication       3 3 S7 connections    Availability of connection resources                                                    Table 3 11 Availability of connection resources  CPU Total number Reserved for Free  connection PG OP communication   S7 basic S7 connections  resources communication communication  312C 6 1 to 5  default 1   1 to 5  default 1 0 to 2  default 2 Displays all non   313C 8 1 to 7  default 1   1 to 7  default 1 0 to 4  default 4 reserved S7  313C 2 PtP connection resources  313C 2 DP as free connection  resources   314C 2 PtP 12 1 to 11  default   1 to 11  default 1 0 to 8  default 8  314C 2 DP 1  312 6 1 to 5  default 1   1 to 5  default 1 0 to 2  default 2  314 12 1 to 11  default   1 to 11  default 1 0 to 8  de
11.      7 4 CPU 315 2 DP  7 4 CPU 315 2 DP  Technical data   Table 7 5 Technical data for the CPU 315 2 DP   Technical data   CPU and version   Order number 6ES7315 2AG10 0ABO   e Hardware version 01   e Firmware version V 2 0 0   e Associated programming package STEP 7 as of V5 1 SP4   Memory   RAM   e Integrated 128 KB   e Expandable No   Load memory Plugged in with MMC  max  8 MB   Data storage life on the MMC At least 10 years    following final programming    Buffering Guaranteed by MMC  maintenance free   Execution times   Processing times of   e Bit operations Min  0 1 us   e Word instructions Min  0 2 us   e Fixed point arithmetic Min  2 0 us   e Floating point arithmetic Min  6 us   Timers counters and their retentivity   S7 counters 256   e Retentive memory Configurable   e Default from CO to C7   e Counting range 0 to 999   IEC Counters Yes   e Type SFB   e Number unlimited  limited only by RAM size   S7 timers 256   e Retentive memory Configurable   e Default Not retentive   e Timer range 10 ms to 9990 s   IEC Timers Yes   e Type SFB   e Number unlimited  limited only by RAM size                 CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05 7 13    Technical data of CPU 31x       7 4 CPU 315 2 DP    7 14       Technical data    Data areas and their retentivity             Flag bits 2048 bytes  e Retentive memory Yes  e Default retentivity MBO to MB15       Clock flag bits    8  1 byte per flag bit                                       
12.      Address areas  I O        Total I O address area    max  8192 bytes 8192 bytes   can be freely addressed                             Distributed max  8192 bytes  I O process image   e Configurable 2048 2048   e Default 256 256   Digital channels 65536 65536   of those local Max  1024          CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05    Technical data of CPU 31x       7 7 CPU 317 2 PN DP       Technical data                                        Analog channels 4096 4096  of those local 256 256  Assembly   Racks Max  4  Modules per rack 8   Number of DP masters   e Integrated 1   e via CP 2   Number of function modules and communication processors you can operate  e FM Max  8   e CP  PtP  Max  8   e CP  LAN  Max  10  Time of day       Real time clock    Yes  hardware clock        e Factory setting    DT 1994 01 01 00 00 00       e Buffered    Yes       e Buffered period    Typically 6 weeks  at an ambient temperature of  104   F        e Behavior of the clock on expiration of the  buffered period    The clock keeps running  continuing at the time   of day it had when power was switched off        e Behavior of the realtime clock after POWER  ON    The clock continues running after POWER OFF        e Accuracy    Deviation per day   lt  10 s                Operating hours counter 4  e Number 0to3  e Value range 2 31 hours   if SFC 101 is used   e Granularity 1 hour       e Retentive    yes  must be manually restarted after every  restar
13.      IEC Timers Yes  e Type SFB  e Number unlimited  limited only by RAM size           7 8    CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05    Technical data of CPU 31x                                                                                                                7 3 CPU 314  Technical data  Data areas and their retentivity  Flag bits 256 bytes  e Retentive memory Yes  e Default retentivity MBO to MB15  Clock flag bits 8  1 byte per flag bit   Data blocks  e Number 511   DB 1 to DB 511   e Length 16 KB  Local data per priority class Max  510  Blocks  Total 1024  DBs  FCs  FBs   The maximum number of blocks that can be  loaded may be reduced if you are using another  MMC   OBs See the Instruction List  e Length 16 KB  Nesting depth  e Per priority class 8  e additional within an error OB 4  FBs See the Instruction List  e Number 512   FB 0 to FB 511   e Length 16 KB  FCs See the Instruction List  e Number 512   FC 0 to FC 511   e Length 16 KB  Address areas  I O   Total I O address area Max  1024 bytes 1024 bytes  can be freely  addressed   I O process image 128 bytes 128 bytes  Digital channels Max  1024  of those local Max  1024  Analog channels Max  256  of those local Max  256  Assembly  Racks Max  4  Modules per rack 8  Number of DP masters  e Integrated None  e viaCP Max  1                CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05 7 9    Technical data of CPU 31x       7 3 CPU 314    7 10
14.      The selected interference suppression also determines the integration time   At an interference suppression of 50 Hz the software filter forms the average based on the  last 20 measurements and saves the result as a measurement value     You can suppress interference frequencies  50 Hz or 60 Hz  according to the parameters set  in STEP 7  A setting of 400 Hz will not suppress interference     An integrated low pass filter attenuates analog input signals of channel 0 to 3     Selection in STEP 7   Software filter        ___  50 Hz configuration  gt    mean value filter                    60 Hz configuration  gt    mean value filter              400 Hz configuration  A D converter a                      Al             Hardware low pass filter   RC circuit     Figure 6 4 Principle of interference suppression with STEP 7    CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05    Technical data of CPU 31xC       6 6 Technical data of the integrated I O    In the two graphics below we illustrate how the 50 Hz and 60 Hz interference suppression  work    Example of a 50 Hz parasitic frequency suppression  integration time corresponds to 20 ms      1 05ms 1 05ms  1 05ms 1 05ms   1 05ms                Cycle 1   e  D    Value Value Value Value Value    4 2 3 19   20  ee  ee ae         1 05ms   1 05ms 1 05 ms 1 05ms 1 05 ms                  Cycle 2   soe   oF  Value   Value Value Value Value  17 2 3 19 20    Se ee  oe    1 averaged measured value    Figure 6
15.     CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05 2 11    Operating and display elements       2 2 Operating and display elements  CPU 31x    CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  2 12 Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05    Communication 3    3 1    3 1 1    Availability    Properties    Interfaces    Multi Point Interface  MPI     All CPUs described in this manual are equipped with an MPI interface X1     A CPU equipped with an MPI DP interface is configured and supplied as MPI  To use the  DP interface  set DP interface mode in STEP 7     The MPI  Multi Point Interface  represents the CPU interface for PG OP connections  or for  communication on an MPI subnet     The typical  default  transmission rate of all CPUs is 187 5 kbps  You can also set 19 2 kbps  for communication with an S7 200  The 315 2 PN DP and 317 CPUs support transmission  rates up to 12 Mbps     The CPU automatically broadcasts its bus configuration via the MPI interface  the  transmission rate  for example   A PG  for example  can thus receive the correct parameters  and automatically connect to a MPI subnet        Note    You may only connect PGs to an MPI subnet which is in RUN    Other stations  for example  OP  TP       should not be connected to the MPI subnet while  the system is in RUN  Otherwise  transferred data might be corrupted as a result  interference  or global data packages may be lost        CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004 
16.     gt  static data  A  function allows transfer of parameters in user program  Functions are therefore suitable for  programming frequently occurring complex functions  e g  calculations     CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05    Glossary       Function block    According to IEC 1131 3  a function block  FB  is a    gt  code block with    gt  static data  An FB  allows the user program to pass parameters  Function blocks are therefore suitable for  programming frequently occurring complex functions  e g  controls  mode selections     Functional ground    GD circuit    GD element    GD packet    Global data    Grounding which has the sole purpose of safeguarding the intended function of electrical  equipment  With functional grounding you short circuit interference voltage which would  otherwise have an unacceptable impact on equipment     A GD circuit comprises a number of CPUs sharing data by means of global data  communication  and is used as follows     e ACPU broadcasts a GD packet to the other CPUs   e ACPU sends and receives a GD packet from another CPU     A GD circuit is identified by a GD circuit number     A GD element is generated by assigning shared global data  It is identified by a unique  global data ID in the global data table     A GD packet can consist of one or several GD elements transmitted in a single message  frame     Global data can be addressed from any code block  FC  FB  OB   In particular  this refers to 
17.    6 48    CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05    Technical data of CPU 31xC       Technical data    Table 6 13 Technical data of digital outputs    6 6 Technical data of the integrated I O       Technical data                         CPU 312C CPU 313C CPU 313C 2 CPU 314C 2  Module specific data CPU 312C CPU 313C CPU 313C 2 CPU 314C 2  Number of outputs 6 16 16 16  e Of those are fast outputs 2 4 4 4   Caution     You cannot connect the high speed outputs of your CPU in parallel                                                                                                           Cable length  e Unshielded Max  600 m  e Shielded Max  1000 m  Voltage  currents  potentials CPU 312C CPU 313C CPU 313C 2 CPU 314C 2  Rated load voltage L  24 VDC  e Polarity reversal protection No  Total current of outputs  per group   e Horizontal assembly      upto 104   F Max  2 0A Max  3 0 A Max  3 0 A Max  3 0 A    up to 60   C Max  1 5 A Max  2 0 A Max  2 0 A Max  2 0 A  e Vertical assembly      up to 104   F Max  1 5A Max  2 0 A Max  2 0 A Max  2 0 A  Electrical isolation  e Between channels and the backplane bus   Yes  e Between the channels No Yes Yes Yes      In groups of   8 8 8  Permitted potential difference  e Between different circuits 75 VDC   60 VAC  Insulation test voltage 500 VDC  Current consumption  e with load voltage L  Max  50 mA Max  100 mA Max  100 mA Max  100 mA  Status  interrupts  diagnostics CPU 312C CPU 313C CPU 313C 2 CPU 3
18.    Functionality   e MPI Yes   e PROFIBUS DP No   e Point to point communication No             CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05    Technical data of CPU 31x       7 3 CPU 314    7 12       Technical data                      MPI   Services   e PG OP communication Yes   e Routing No   e Global data communication Yes   e S7 basic communication Yes   e S7 communication Yes      As server Yes      As client    No  but via CP and loadable FBs        e Transmission rates    187 5 kbps       Programming             Programming language LAD FBD STL  Available instructions See the Instruction List  Nesting levels 8       System functions  SFCs     See the Instruction List       System function blocks  SFBs     See the Instruction List       User program security    Yes       Dimensions       Mounting dimensions W x H x D  mm     40 x 125 x 130             Weight 280 g  Voltages and currents  Power supply  rated value  24 VDC       e Permitted range    20 4 V to 28 8 V       Current consumption  no load operation     Typically 60 mA                         Inrush current Typically 2 5 A  Power consumption  nominal value  0 6 A   It 0 5 A   s  External fusing of power supply lines min  2A   recommended    Power loss Typically 2 5 W       CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05       Technical data of CPU 31x                                                                                                  
19.    Input ranges  rated value  input resistance          e Voltage   10 V 100 kQ  0 V to 10 V 100 kQ  e Current   20 mA 50 Q    0 mA to 20 mA 50 Q  4 mA to 20 mA 50 Q       e Resistance    0 Q to 600 0 10 MQ       e Resistance thermometer    Pt 100 10 MQ       Permitted continuous input voltage  destruction limit                             e For voltage inputs Max  30 V   e For current inputs Max  2 5 V  Permitted continuous input current  destruction limit    e For voltage inputs Max  0 5 mA   e For current inputs Max  50 mA        6 52    CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05    Technical data of CPU 31xC       6 6 Technical data of the integrated I O       Technical data    Connection of signal generators       e For voltage measurement    Possible       e For current measurement      as 2 wire measuring transducer      as 4 wire measuring transducer    Possible  with external power supply  Possible       e for measuring resistance      with 2 wire connection        with 3 wire connection    Possible  without compensation of  cable resistance             Not possible      with 4 wire connection Not possible  Linearization of the characteristics trend By software  e For resistance thermometers Pt 100  Temperature compensation No       Technical unit for temperature measurement             Degrees Celsius Fahrenheit Kelvin       6 6 9 Analog outputs    Introduction    This chapter contains the specifications for digital outputs of CPUs
20.    Table 3 4 GD resources of the CPUs                            Parameters CPU 31xC  312  314   CPU 315 2 DP   315 2 PN DP  317   Number of GD circuits per CPU Max  4 Max  8   GD packets transmitted per GD circuit Max  1 Max  1   GD packets transmitted by all GD circuits Max  4 Max  8   GD packets received per GD circuit Max  1 Max  1   GD packets received by all GD circuits Max  4 Max  8   Data length per GD packet max  22 bytes max  22 bytes   Consistency max  22 bytes max  22 bytes   Min  reduction ratio  default  1  8  1  8                    3 2 7 Routing    Properties    STEP 7 V5 1   SP4 or higher allows you to access your S7 stations on all subnets with your  PG PC  for example  to    e download user programs  e download a hardware configuration  or    e perform debugging and diagnostic functions        Note    When the CPU is used as intelligent slave  the routing function is only available when the  DP interface is set active  IN STEP 7  set the Test  Commission Routing check box on  the properties dialog of the DP interface  For detailed information  refer to the  Programming with STEP 7 manual  or directly to the STEP 7 Online Help       CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  3 10 Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05    Communication       3 2 Communication services    Routing network nodes  MPI   DP    Gateways between subnets are routed in a SIMATIC station that is equipped with interfaces  to the respective subnets  The figure below shows CPU 1  DP master  a
21.    The following times apply for the CPUs described in this manual   e Delay interrupt      200 us  e Watchdog interrupt      200 us    These times only apply if the interrupt can actually be executed at this time and if not  interrupted  for example  by higher priority interrupts or queued interrupts of equal priority     CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05 5 23    Cycle and reaction times       5 6 Sample calculations    5 6 Sample calculations  5 6 1 Example of cycle time calculation  Installation    You have configured an S7 300 and equipped it with following modules in rack  0    e a CPU 314C 2   e 2 digital input modules SM 321  DI 32 x 24 VDC  4 bytes each in the PI    e 2 digital output modules SM 322  DO 32 x 24 VDC 0 5 A  4 bytes each in the PI     User program    According to the Instruction List  the user program runtime is 5 ms  There is no active  communication     Calculating the cycle time  In this example  the cycle time is equivalent to the sum of the following times   e User program execution time   approx  5 ms x CPU specific factor 1 10   approx  5 5 ms  e Process image transfer time  Process image of inputs  100 us   8 Byte x 37 us   approx  0 4 ms  Process image of outputs  100 us   8 Byte x 37 us   approx  0 4 ms  e Operating system runtime at the scan cycle checkpoint   approx  0 5 ms    Cycle time   5 5 ms   0 4 ms   0 4 ms   0 5 ms   6 8 ms     Calculating the physical cycle time  e There is no active commun
22.    of those as status variable Max  30      of those as control variable Max  14   Forcing Yes       e Variables    Inputs  outputs                            e Number of variables Max  10  Block status Yes  Single step Yes  Breakpoints 2  Diagnostic buffer Yes   e Number of entries  not configurable    Max  100          CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05    6 23    Technical data of CPU 31xC       6 5 CPU 314C 2 PtP and CPU 314C 2 DP       Technical data       Communication functions    CPU 314C 2 PtP  CPU 314C 2 PtP    CPU 314C 2 DP  CPU 314C 2 DP                      PG OP communication Yes   Global data communication Yes   e Number of GD circuits 4   e Number of GD packets Max  4      Sending stations Max  4      Receiving stations Max  4   e Length of GD packets max  22 bytes      Consistent data 22 bytes   S7 basic communication Yes       e User data per request      Consistent data    max  76 bytes  76 bytes  for X_SEND or X_RCV   64 bytes  for X_PUT or X_GET as the server        S7 communication       e As server    Yes       e as client    Yes  via CP and loadable FBs        e User data per request    max  180 bytes  with PUT GET                                 Consistent data 64 bytes   5 compatible communication Yes  via CP and loadable FCs   Number of connections Max  12  can be used for  e PG communication Max  11      Reserved  default  1      Configurable from 1 to 11  e OP communication Max  11      Reserved  default 
23.   1 us     DP only  for the integrated DP  interface                CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05 5 5    Cycle and reaction times       5 2 Cycle time                   Table 5 4 CPU 31x  Data for calculating the process image  PI  transfer time  Const  Portions CPU 312 CPU 314 CPU 315 CPU 317  K Base load 150 us 100 us 100 us 50 us  A per byte in module 37 us 35 us 37 us 15 us  rack 0  B per byte in module   43 us 47 us 25 us  racks 1 to 3    D per WORD in the DP     1 us 1 us   DP only  area for the integrated  DP interface  P per WORD in the     46 us 46 us   PROFINET   PROFINET area for  only  the integrated  PROFINET interface                                60 Us per rack        60 us per rack    Extending the user program processing time    In addition to actually working through the user program  your CPU s operating system also  runs a number of processes in parallel   such as timer management for the core operating system  These processes extend the  processing time of the user program  The table below lists the multiplication factors required  to calculate your user program processing time                                   Table 5 5 Extending the user program processing time  CPU Factor  312C 1 06  313C 1 10  313C 2DP 1 10  313C PtP 1 06  314C 2DP 1 10  314C 2PtP 1 09  312 1 06  314 1 10  315 1 10  317 1 07                CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05    Cycle and reactio
24.   DO 0 1      23 V1 X  X x  ZO HW gate  No 40  DI 0 2   DO 0 2      24 V2 x  X X Z1  A  Prob 0   52  DI 0 3   DO 0 3      25 V3 1  X  X X Z1 B   Bero0   69  Di 0 4   DO 0 4      26 xX  X X  Z1 HW gate  70  Di 0 5   DO 0 5      27 xX  X X 22  A  8  DI 0 6   DO 0 6      28 CONV_EN x  X X Z2  B  9  DI 0 7   DO 0 7      29 CONV_DIR x  10    2M    30  110 3L    31  X X Z2 HW gate  12  Dl 1 0   DO 1 0      32 R  X  X X zA  N 130  Di 1 1   DO 1 1 033  R  X  X X Z3  B  1  14  DIi 1 2   DO 1 2      34  Rapid X  X X IZ3 HW gate    150  DI 1 3   DO 1 3      35  Creep X  X X ZO  Latch  16  Di 1 4   DO 1 4      36 X  X x Z1  Latch  17   DI 1 5   DO 1 5     37 X  X X Z2  Latch  18  Dl 1 6   DO 1 6      38 X  X X Z3  Latch   1  19    Dl 1 7_   DO 1 7      39 X  20  1M 3M   40  Zn Counter n  A B Encoder signals  HW gate Gate control  Latch Store counter distance  Vn Comparator n  Prob 0 Measuring probe 0  Bero 0 Reference point switch 0  R   R  Directional signal  Rapid Rapid traverse  Creep Creep speed    CONV_EN Power section enable  CONV_DIR Directional signal  only with control type  voltage 0 to 10 V or current from 0 to 10 mA and directional signal    x Pin usable if not assigned to technology functions    1  CPU 314C 2 only    Reference    Details are found in the Manual 7echnica  Functions under Counting  Frequency  Measurement and Pulse Width Modulation    CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  6 30 Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05    Technical data of CPU 31xC       6 6 Techn
25.   Yes  electronic          e Response threshold       Typically 1A          6 50    CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05    Technical data of CPU 31xC       6 6 8 Analog inputs    Introduction    6 6 Technical data of the integrated I O    This chapter contains the specifications for analog outputs of CPUs 31xC     The table includes the following CPUs     e CPU 313C  e CPU 314C 2 DP  e CPU 314C 2 PtP    Technical data    Table 6 14 Technical data of analog inputs       Technical data  Module specific data       Number of inputs    4 channels with current voltage input  1 channel with resistance input                   Cable length   e Shielded Max  100 m  Voltage  currents  potentials   Resistance input   e No load voltage Typically 2 5 V       e Measurement current    Typically 1 8 mA to 3 3 mA       Electrical isolation                      e Between channels and the backplane bus Yes   e Between the channels No   Permitted potential difference   e Between inputs  Alc  and Mana  Ucm  8 0 VDC   e between Mana and Minternai  Uiso  75 VDC   60 VAC  Insulation test voltage 600 VDC       Analog value generation       Measurement principle    Actual value encoding  successive  approximation        Integration time conversion time resolution  per channel              e Configurable Yes  e Integration time in ms 2 5 16 6  20  e Permitted input frequency Max  400 Hz       e Resolution  including overdrive     11 bits   signed bit          e 
26.   cable resistance      wire connection  test lead  Not possible       e For current outputs      wire connection Possible                CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05 6 55    Technical data of CPU 31xC       6 6 Technical data of the integrated   O    CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  6 56 Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05    Technical data of CPU 31x    7 1 General technical data    7 1 1 Dimensions of CPU 31x    Each CPU features the same height and depth  only the width dimensions differ     e Height  125 mm    e Depth  115 mm  or 180 mm with opened front cover              125             y       115    65                               Figure 7 1 Dimensions of CPU 31x                   Width of CPU  CPU Width  CPU 312 40 mm  CPU 314 40 mm  CPU 315 2 DP 40 mm  CPU 315 2 PN DP 80 mm  CPU 317 80 mm             CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05    7 1       Technical data of CPU 31x       7 1 General technical data    7 1 2 Technical data of the Micro Memory Card  MMC     Plug in SIMATIC Micro Memory Cards  The following memory modules are available     Table 7 1 Available MMCs       Type Order number Required for a firmware update via MMC   MMC 64k 6ES7 953 8LFxx OAAO     MMC 128k   6ES7 953 8LGxx OAAO      MMC 512k   6ES7 953 8LJxx OAA0     MMC 2M 6ES7 953 8LLxx OAA0O Minimum requirement for CPUs without DP interface  MMC 4M 6ES7 953 8LMxx OAAO Minimum requirement for CPUs
27.   e PG OP communication   Yes   e Routing   Yes   e Global data communication   No   e S7 basic communication   No   e S7 communication   No   e Constant bus cycle time   Yes   e SYNC FREEZE   Yes   e Enable disable DP slaves   Yes   e DPV1   Yes   e Transmission rates   Up to 12 Mbps  e Number of DP slaves per station   Max  32       e Address area    Max  1KB1 1KBO          e User data per DP slave             max  244 bytes     244 bytes O       CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05    6 25    Technical data of CPU 31xC       6 5 CPU 314C 2 PtP and CPU 314C 2 DP       Technical data       CPU 314C 2 PtP    CPU 314C 2 DP             DP slave   Number of connections   12  Services   e PG OP communication   Yes                   e Routing   Yes  only if interface is active   e Global data communication   No   e S7 basic communication   No   e S7 communication   No   e Direct data exchange   Yes       e Transmission rates    Up to 12 Mbps       e Intermediate memory    244 bytes     244 bytes O       e Automatic baud rate search    Yes  only if interface is passive        e Address areas    Max  32  with max  32 bytes each       e DPV1    No       GSD file    The latest GSD file is available at     http   www ad siemens de support    in the Product Support area       Point to point communication       e Transmission rates    38 4 kbps half duplex  19 2 kbps full duplex       e Cable length    Max  1200 m       e User program can control 
28.   new  Yes Yes Module status information of all submodules of a   W 16 0696 module using the logical address of the module  not   possible for submodule 0   new  Yes Yes Module status information of a submodule using the   W 16 0C96 logical address of this submodule   W 16 xy92 No Yes Rack stations status information   replacement  SSL ID Replace this SSL with the SSL with the ID W 16 xy94  W 16 0x94  in PROFIBUS DP as well    new  Yes Yes Rack station status information   W 16 0x94                      CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05 3 23    Communication       3 2 Communication services    Detailed Information    For detailed descriptions of the individual system status lists  refer to the manual System  Software for S7 300 400 System and Standard Functions     3 2 10 4 Open communication via Industrial Ethernet    Requirements  e CPU 31x 2 PN DP with firmware version 2 2 0 or higher   e STEP 7 V5 3   Servicepack 1 or higher    Functionality    CPUs with Firmware V2 3 0 or higher and integrated PROFINET interface support the open  communication functionality via Industrial Ethernet  in short  open  E communication     Open IE communication is always handled directly via TCP IP     How to use open IE communication    To be able to exchange data with other TCP IP compatible communication partners by  means of the user program  STEP 7 provides four FBs and one UDT for the configuration of  your connection     e FB 63  TSEND   for s
29.   recommended  LS switch Type B min  4 A  Power loss Typically 6 W   Reference    In Chapter Specifications of the integrated I O you can find    e the specifications of integrated I Os under Digital inputs of CPUs 31xC and Digital outputs    of CPUs 31xC     e the block diagrams of the integrated I Os under Arrangement and usage of integrated    I Os     6 3 CPU 313C    Technical data    Table 6 4 Technical data of CPU 313C       Technical data  CPU and version       Order number    6ES7 313 5BE01 0AB0       e Hardware version    01       e Firmware version    V2 0 0       e Associated programming package    STEP 7 as of V5 2   SP 1     please use previous CPU for STEP 7 V 5 1    SP 3 or later                 Memory   RAM   e Integrated 32 KB  e Expandable No       Load memory    Plugged in with MMC  max  8 MB        Data storage life on the MMC   following final programming     At least 10 years       Buffering    Guaranteed by MMC  maintenance free        Execution times       Processing times of                      e Bit operations min  0 1 us  e Word instructions min  0 2 us  e Fixed point arithmetic min  2 us  e Floating point arithmetic min  6 us          6 8    CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05    Technical data of CPU 31xC                                                                                  6 3 CPU 313C   Technical data  Timers counters and their retentivity  S7 counters 256  e Retentive memory Configurable  e 
30.   the OP can establish a connection to the CPU  Since an OP maintains  its communication link at all times  in contrast to the PG  you cannot subsequently establish  another connection via the PG     See also  Open communication via Industrial Ethernet  Page 3 24     CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  3 28 Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05    Communication       3 3 3    Distribution of connection resources    Table 3 10 Distribution of connections    3 3 S7 connections    Distribution and availability of S7 connection resources       Communication service  PG communication  OP communication  S7 basic communication    Distribution    In order to avoid allocation of connection resources being dependent only on  the chronological sequence in which various communication services are  requested  connection resources can be reserved for these services     For PG and OP communication respectively  at least one connection  resource is reserved by default     In the table below  and in the technical data of the CPUs  you can find the  configurable S7 connection resources and the default configuration for each  CPU  You  redistribute    connection resources by setting the relevant CPU  parameters in STEP 7        S7 communication    Other communication resources  e g  via  CP 343 1  with a data length of   gt  240 bytes     Here you allocate connection resources which are still available and not  reserved for a specific service  PG OP communication  S7 based  communication   
31.  08 2004  A5E00105475 05    Glossary       Proxy    The PROFINET device with proxy functionality is the substitute for a PROFIBUS device on  Ethernet  The proxy functionality allows a PROFIBUS device to communicate not only with  its master but also with all nodes on PROFINET     You can integrate existing PROFIBUS systems into PROFINET communication  for example  with the help of an IE PB Link or a CPU 31x 2 PN DP  IE PB LinkThe IE PB Link then  handles communication over PROFINET as a substitute for the PROFIBUS components     See PROFINET Device    Work memory is a RAM memory in the CPU which is accessed by the processor during user  program execution     RAM  Random Access Memory  is a semiconductor read write memory     Real Time  Real time means that a system processes external events within a defined time   Determinism means that a system reacts in a predictable  deterministic  manner     In industrial networks  both these requirements are important  PROFINET meets these  requirements  PROFINET is implemented as a deterministic real time network as follows     e The transfer of time critical data between different stations over a network within a  defined interval is guaranteed     To achieve this  PROFINET provides an optimized communication channel for real time  communication   Real Time  RT      e An exact prediction of the time at which the data transfer takes place is possible     e tis guaranteed that problem free communication using other standard protocols  fo
32.  1      Configurable from 1 to 11  e S7 based communication Max  8      Reserved  default  8      Configurable from 0 to 8  Routing No Max  4  Interfaces CPU 314C 2 PtP CPU 314C 2 DP          1st interface       Type of interface    Integrated RS485 interface                                  Physics RS 485  electrically isolated No   Interface power supply  15 to 30 VDC    Max  200 mA  Functionality   e MPI Yes   e PROFIBUS DP No   e Point to point communication No       6 24    CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05    Technical data of CPU 31xC       6 5 CPU 314C 2 PtP and CPU 314C 2 DP       Technical data       CPU 314C 2 PtP CPU 314C 2 DP                         MPI  Number of connections 12  Services  e PG OP communication Yes  e Routing No Yes  e Global data communication Yes  e S7 basic communication Yes  e S7 communication      As server Yes      As client    No  but via CP and loadable FBs        e Transmission rates    max  187 5 kbps       2nd interface    CPU 314C 2 PtP    CPU 314C 2 DP       Type of interface    Integrated RS422 RS485 interface    Integrated RS485 interface                                                                      Physics RS 422 485 RS 485  electrically isolated Yes Yes  Interface power supply  15 to 30 VDC    No Max  200 mA  Number of connections None 12  Functionality   e MPI No No   e PROFIBUS DP No Yes   e Point to point communication Yes No   DP master   Number of connections   12  Services 
33.  1Al 2 AO  Assembly   Racks Max  4       Modules per rack    max  8  max  7 in rack 3       Number of DP masters                         e Integrated None  e via CP Max  2  Number of function modules and communication  processors you can operate   e FM Max  8  e CP  PtP  Max  8  e CP  LAN  Max  6  Time of day       Real time clock    Yes  HW clock        e Buffered    Yes       e Buffered period    Typically 6 weeks  at an ambient temperature of  40   C        e Behavior of the clock on expiration of the  buffered period    The clock keeps running  continuing at the time   of day it had when power was switched off        e Accuracy    Deviation per day  lt  10s       Operating hours counter    1             e Number 0  e Value range 2 31 hours    if SFC 101 is used   e Granularity 1 hour       e Retentive    Yes  must be manually restarted after every  restart             Clock synchronization Yes  e Inthe PLC Master  e On MPI Master slave       S7 signaling functions          Number of stations that can be logged on for  signaling functions       Max  8     depends on the number of connections  configured for PG   OP and S7 basic  communication           CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05    Technical data of CPU 31xC       6 3 CPU 313C       Technical data             Process diagnostics messages Yes   e Simultaneously enabled interrupt S blocks Max  20  Testing and commissioning functions   Status control variables Yes       e Var
34.  31x  Technical data  6 38 Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05    Technical data of CPU 31xC  6 6 Technical data of the integrated I O       6 6 3 Configuration    Introduction  You configure the integrated I O of CPU 31xC with STEP 7  Always make these settings  when the CPU is in STOP  The generated parameters are downloaded from the PG to the   7 300 and written to CPU memory    You can also choose to change the parameters at SFC 55 in the user program  see the    Reference Manual System and Standard Functions   Refer to the structure of record 1 for  the respective parameters     Parameters of standard DI    The table below gives you an overview of the parameters for standard digital inputs     Table 6 7 Parameters of standard DI       Parameters Value range Default Range of efficiency  Input delay  ms  0 1 0 5 3 15 3 Channel group                      The table below gives you an overview of the parameters when using digital inputs as  interrupt inputs     Table 6 8 Parameters of the interrupt inputs             Parameters Value range Default Range of efficiency   Interrupt input Disabled   disabled digital input  positive edge   Interrupt input Disabled  disabled digital input  negative edge                   CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data    Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05 6 39    Technical data of CPU 31xC       6 6 Technical data of the integrated   O                                     Bit Nr   Interrupt input DI  0 0    Interrupt input DI  0 1  In
35.  31xC     The table includes the following CPUs     e CPU 313C  e CPU 314C 2 DP  e CPU 314C 2 PtP    Technical data    Table 6 15 Technical data of analog outputs                                     Technical data   Module specific data   Number of outputs 2   Cable length   e Shielded Max  200 m  Voltage  currents  potentials   Rated load voltage L  24 VDC  e Polarity reversal protection Yes  Electrical isolation   e Between channels and the backplane bus Yes   e Between the channels No             CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05    6 53    Technical data of CPU 31xC       6 6 Technical data of the integrated I O       Technical data    Permitted potential difference       e between Mana and Minternai  Uiso     75 VDC   60 VAC       Insulation test voltage    600 VDC       Analog value generation       Resolution  including overdrive     11 bits   signed bit                                                 Conversion time  per channel  1 ms  Settling time   e with resistive load 0 6 ms   e With capacitive load 1 0 ms   e With inductive load 0 5 ms  Interference suppression  error limits   Crosstalk between the outputs  gt  60 dB  Operational error limits  across the temperature range  in relation to output   range    e Voltage current  1   Basic error limit  operational limit at 25   C  in relation to output range    e Voltage current  0 7    Temperature error  in relation to output range    0 01   K  Linearity error  in relation 
36.  5 50 Hz interference suppression    CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05 6 37    Technical data of CPU 31xC       6 6 Technical data of the integrated   O    Example of a 60 Hz parasitic frequency suppression  integration time corresponds to 16 7 ms       1 05ms 1 05ms 1 05 ms 1 05ms   1 05ms                Cycle 1   ea         Value Value Value Value Value  i 4 2 3 16   17   a ae    1 05ms  1 05ms 1 05 ms 1 05ms 1 05 ms                  Cycle 2 a H  Value Value Value Value Value    1  2 3 16 17 i  e ee   a    1 averaged measured value    Figure 6 6 60 Hz interference suppression       Note    If the interference frequency is not 50 60 Hz or a multiple thereof  the input signal must be  filtered externally    In this case  400 Hz frequency suppression must be configured for the respective input  This  is equivalent to a  Deactivation  of the software filter        Inputs not connected    The three inputs of a current voltage analog output channel that is not connected should be  bypasses and connected to Mana  pin 20 of the front connector   This ensures maximum  interference resistance for these analog inputs     Outputs not connected    In order to disconnect unused analog outputs from power  you must disable and leave them  open during parameter assignment with STEP 7     Reference    Details  visualization and processing of analog values  for example  are found in chapter 4 of  the Module Data Reference Manual     CPU 31xC and CPU
37.  A5E00105475 05 3 1    Communication       3 7 Interfaces    Devices capable of MPI communication  e PG PC  e OP TP  e    7 300   S7 400 with MPI interface  e  7 200  19 2 kbps only     3 1 2 PROFIBUS DP    Availability  CPUs with    DP    name suffix are equipped at least with a DP X2 interface     The 315 2 PN DP and 317 CPUs are equipped with an MPI DP X1 interface  A CPU with  MPI DP interface is supplied with a default MPI configuration  You need to set DP mode in  STEP 7 if you want to use the DP interface     Operating modes for CPUs with two DP interfaces    Table 3 1 Operating modes for CPUs with two DP interfaces       MPI DP interface  X1  PROFIBUS DP interface  X2   e MPI e not configured   e DP master e DP master   e DPslave 1 e DP slave 1                1 simultaneous operation of the DP slave on both interfaces is excluded    Properties    The PROFIBUS DP interface is mainly used to connect distributed I O  PROFIBUS DP  allows you to create large subnets  for example     The PROFIBUS DP interface can be set for operation in master or slave mode  and supports  transmission rates up to 12 Mbps     The CPU broadcasts its bus parameters  transmission rate  for example  via the  PROFIBUS DP interface when master mode is set  A PG  for example  can thus receive the  correct parameters and automatically connect to a PROFIBUS subnet  In your configuration  you can specify to disable bus parameter broadcasting     CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  3 2 Manual  Editio
38.  Handling with modules   i222 4 videeieesdacdesnnceeystebe AS A N A tatdeietabedaeetadtets  4 2 3 1 Download of new blocks or delta COWNIOadS           2    cececceeccececeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeesecacaaeeeeeeeeeeeeseaees  4 23 2 Uploading DIOCKS  ecesaicisracensiiiniiniein aE AREE  A233 Deleng DIOCKS cresson a  4 234 Compressing DIOCKS ocnierciirrcrineirinr i ereina EENE EEEE AE EEATT EEEE  4 2 3 5  Promming  RAM 10 ROM Jessin a AA nara A RO   4 2 4 CPU memory reset and restart            cc eeeeceee cence ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceaeeeeeseaeeeeeseeeeeeeseneeeeeseeaeeeteeeaeees  4 2 5 RECIPES ennnen nannini a eapi an ei aaiae dadd Aaaa iaidd adiada agence     4 2 6 Measured value Tog TGS  cssrisnnrss eaa Ea  4 2 7 Backup of project data to a Micro Memory Card  MMC                  ccceeceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeesaeeseaes  Cycle and reaction times encensa sas svedetiseiadecadstvelactivasassdvaseebianenney   5 1 OVEIVIGW  fedecicdecdereadudedeadvedis feaca va seced ledacesaleaedea edhe daa landed ed eeu aes ee id eee eae ee   5 2 Cycle MUMS see eae Sana aeaa aE A EENAA AEA A E dead coda T AAA EE ESERE  5 2 1 OAEIAE T E E E T E   5 2 2 Calculating the cycle te  ic   sasonosiaarsiio aaa a a a aE A  5 2 3 Different Cycle times                 ccccccceeeeeceecee cece ceeeeeeceeaaeceeeeeeescaacaeceeeeesesecaeaeeeeeeeeseseccaaeeeeeeseesnaeess  5 2 4 COMMUNICATION load seanma asdatcanacaadecendeaduennacsauven daacuanncevad sea den aaa  5 2 5 Cycle time extension as a result of testing and commis
39.  Installation  Configuring     Distribution of modules to several  racks       How to mount modules on racks   mounting rails           7 300  CPU 31xC and CPU 31x operating instructions   Installation  Assembly     Installing modules on the mounting  rail          Table 1 4 The use of local and distributed I O       Information on    Which range of modules do   want to use           is available in      For local I O and expansion devices  Module Data reference  manual    For distributed I O and PROFIBUS DP  Manual of the  relevant I O device          Table 1 5    Configuration consisting of the Central Unit  CU  and Expansion Modules  EMs        Information on      Which rack   mounting rail is most suitable for my  application     is available in         7 300  CPU 31xC and CPU 31x operating instructions   Installation  Configuring       Which interface modules  IM  do   need to connect the EMs  to the CU      7 300  CPU 31xC and CPU 31x operating instructions   Installation  Configuring     Distribution of modules to several  racks       What is the right power supply  PS  for my application            7 300  CPU 31xC and CPU 31x operating instructions   Installation  Configuring          1 2    CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05    Guide to the S7 300 documentation       Table 1 6 CPU performance       Information on      Which memory concept is best suited to my application     is available in      CPU 31xC and CPU 31x Manual  
40.  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05    Technical data of CPU 31xC  6 6 Technical data of the integrated I O       6 6 4 Interrupts    Interrupt inputs  All digital inputs of the on board I O of CPUs 31xC can be used as interrupt inputs     You can specify interrupt behavior for each individual input in your parameter declaration   Options are     e no interrupt  e Interrupt at the positive edge  e Interrupt at the negative edge    e Interrupt at the positive and negative edge       Note    Every channel will hold one event if the rate of incoming interrupts exceeds the handling  capacity of OB40  Further events  interrupts  will be lost  without diagnostics or explicit  message        Start information for OB40    The table below shows the relevant temporary variables  TEMP  of OB40 for the interrupt  inputs of 31xC CPUs  A description of process interrupt OB 40 is found in the Reference  Manual System and Standard Functions     Table 6 11 Start information for OB40  relating to the interrupt inputs of the integrated I O       Byte   Variables Data type Description    6 7 OB40_MDL_ADDR WORD BH16 7C Address of the interrupt   triggering module  here  default  addresses of the digital inputs     8on  OB40_POINT_ADDR DWORD see the figure Displaying the interrupt   below triggering integrated inputs                            CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05 6 45    Technical data of CPU 31xC       6 6 Technical data of the integr
41.  Max  4       Modules per rack    max  8  max  7 in rack 3       Number of DP masters       e Integrated    No 1       e viaCP          Max  1 Max  1             CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05    6 15    Technical data of CPU 31xC       6 4 CPU 313C 2 PtP and CPU 313C 2 DP       Technical data       Number of function modules and  communication processors you can  operate    CPU 313C 2 PtP CPU 313C 2 DP                   e FM Max  8  e CP  PtP  Max  8  e CP  LAN  Max  6  Time of day CPU 313C 2 PtP CPU 313C 2 DP       Real time clock    Yes  HW clock        e Buffered    Yes       e Buffered period    Typically 6 weeks  at an ambient temperature of 40   C        e Behavior of the clock on expiration of  the buffered period    The clock keeps running  continuing at the time of day it had when power was  switched off        e Accuracy    Deviation per day  lt  10s       Operating hours counter    1             e Number 0  e Value range 2 31 hours    if SFC 101 is used   e Granularity 1 hour       e Retentive    Yes  must be manually restarted after every restart             Clock synchronization Yes  e Inthe PLC Master  e On MPI Master slave       S7 signaling functions    CPU 313C 2 PtP CPU 313C 2 DP          Number of stations that can log in for  signaling functions  e g  OS     Max  8     depends on the number of connections configured for PG   OP and S7 basic  communication        Process diagnostics messages    Yes       e Sim
42.  Max  8   e CP  LAN  Max  4   Time of day   Real time clock Yes  SW clock    e Buffered No   e Accuracy Deviation per day  lt  10s   e Behavior of the realtime clock after POWER  The clock keeps running  continuing at the time    OFF of day it had when power was switched off    Operating hours counter 1   e Number 0   e Value range 2 31 hours   if SFC 101 is used    e Granularity 1 hour   e Retentive Yes  must be manually restarted after every  restart   Clock synchronization Yes   e Inthe PLC Master   e OnMPI Master slave        7 signaling functions       Number of stations that can be logged on for max  6   signaling functions  depends on the number of connections  configured for PG   OP and S7 basic  communication        Process diagnostics messages Yes       e Simultaneously enabled interrupt S blocks Max  20       Testing and commissioning functions                      Status control variables Yes  e Variables Inputs  outputs  memory bits  DBs  timers   counters  e Number of variables Max  30      Of those as status variable Max  30      Of those as control variable Max  14  Forcing Yes  e Variables Inputs  outputs  e Number of variables Max  10                CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05 6 5    Technical data of CPU 31xC       6 2 CPU 312C    6 6       Technical data                                     Block status Yes  Single step Yes  Breakpoints 2  Diagnostic buffer Yes  e Number of entries  not configurable  Max  10
43.  Neither PROFIBUS DP  nor PROFINET IO are being used  so you do not have to make  allowances for any DP cycle times on PROFIBUS DP or for PROFINET IO update times     e Response times plus I O delay     5 26    Case 1  An output channel of the digital output module is set when a signal is received  at the digital input  The result is a response time of     Response time   42 ms   4 8 ms   46 8 ms     Case 2  An analog value is fetched  and an analog value is output  The result is a  response time of     Longest response time   42 ms   176 ms   3 3 ms   221 3 ms     CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05    Cycle and reaction times  5 6 Sample calculations       5 6 3 Example of interrupt response time calculation    Installation    You have assembled an S7 300  consisting of one CPU 314C 2 and four digital modules in  the CPU rack  One of the digital input modules is an SM 321  DI 16 x 24 VDC  with  process diagnostic interrupt function     You have enabled only the process interrupt in your CPU and SM parameter configuration   You decided not to use time controlled processing  diagnostics or error handling  You have  configured a 20  communication load on the cycle     You have configured a delay of 0 5 ms for the inputs of the DI module     No activities are required at the scan cycle checkpoint     Calculation  In this example  the process interrupt response time is based on following time factors   e Process interrupt response time o
44.  Operating and display elements                    cccceceeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesesceeeeeeeeeeeeeseceeeeeeeeeeeesseeeeeeeneeess 2 1  2 1 Operating and display elements  CPU 31XC  0     eeceeeeceeeeeenneeeee ener eee eeeaeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaeeeeeenaeeeeeeeaas  2 1 1 Status and Error Indicators  CPU 31XC            eccccccceceeeeceeeeeeeccaeeeeeeeeececaaeaeeeeeeesesenceaeeeeeeeeeeeeeaes  2 2 Operating and display elements  CPU 31X    0     eeccceceneeeeeenneeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaeeesesaaeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaas 2 5    2 2 1 Operating and display elements  CPU 312  314  315 2 DP             ceccccccceceeeeeceececeeeeeeeeteeseaeees 2 5  2 2 2 Operating and display elements  CPU 317 2 DP  sassessssessssesrrsserrsseirrestirrssttrrnsttnrssrennnntennnt 2 1   2 2 3 Operating and display elements  CPU 31x 2 PN DP   sssssessssesssrsesssrrssesnnasssnnanannnnanrannaannnnantenn 2 9  2 2 4 Status and error displays of the CPU 31X     0    ecient ee eet reer eine ee ee taeeeeetaeeeeetaeeeeeseeeeread  3 COMMUNICATORS ANER ENA EEA E AREE EA EE A  3 1 cinico e A E a a E T 3 1  3 1 1 Multi Point Interface  MPI   3 1 2 PROFIBUS DP nauona aa iaa iaa E ERA A E E E Ea  3 1 3 PROFINET  PN  rainei aeaiiai AAEE EEEE O EEEE  3 1 4 Pont to Pont  PUP  orisa na giu EA AE EA S A ESA A  3 2 Communication SEIVICES iienaa i aa A a aa A a A A A  3 2 1 Overview of communication Services                 cccccceceeeeeeeeeeneeceeeeeeeseeeaeaeceeceseeeseseeaeeeeeeeseeeeseaaees  3 2 2 PG COMMUNICALION              
45.  Product Support area       Programming             Programming language LAD FBD STL  Available instructions See the Instruction List  Nesting levels 8       System functions  SFCs     See the Instruction List       System function blocks  SFBs     See the Instruction List       User program security    Yes       Dimensions       Mounting dimensions W x H x D  mm     40 x 125 x 130             Weight 290g  Voltages and currents  Power supply  rated value  24 VDC       e Permitted range    20 4 V to 28 8 V       Current consumption  no load operation     Typically 60 mA                            Inrush current Typically 2 5A  Power consumption  nominal value  0 8A   It 0 5 A   s  External fusing of power supply lines min  2A   recommended    Power loss Typically 2 5 W       CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05    Technical data of CPU 31x       7 5 CPU 315 2 PN DP    Technical data    7 5 CPU 315 2 PN DP    Table 7 6 Technical data for the CPU 315 2 PN DP       Technical data  CPU and version       Order number    6ES7315 2EG10 0ABO       e Hardware version    01       e Firmware version    V 2 3 0       e Associated programming package    STEP 7 as of V 5 3   SP 1                data blocks    Memory   RAM   e RAM 128 KB  e Expandable No  Capacity of the retentive memory for retentive 128 KB       Load memory    Plugged in with MMC  max  8 MB        Buffering    Guaranteed by MMC  maintenance free        Data storage life on the MMC  
46.  SIMATIC S7 modules  A CPU can  maintain several simultaneous connections to one or several OPs     Data exchanged by means of S7 basic communication    S7 based communication is used to exchange data between S7 CPUs and the  communication capable SIMATIC modules within an S7 station  acknowledged data  exchange   Data are exchanged across non configured S7 connections  The service is  available via MPI subnet  or within the station to function modules  FM      S7 based communication provides the functions you require for data exchange  These  functions are integrated into the CPU operating system  The user can utilize this service by  means of  System function   SFC  user interface     CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05 3 7    Communication       3 2 Communication services                            Reference  e Details on SFCs are found in the  nsfruction list  for more details refer to the  STEP 7 Online Help or to the System and Standard Functions Reference Manual   e For further information on communication  refer to the Communication with SIMATIC  manual   3 2 5 S7 communication  Properties  A CPU can always operate in server or client mode in S7 communication  We distinguish  between  e communication with unilateral configuration  for PUT GET only   e communication with bilateral configuration  for USEND  URCV  BSEND  BRCV  PUT   GET   However  the functionality depends on the CPU  A CP is therefore required in certain  situat
47.  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05    Memory concept       4 1 Memory areas and retentivity    4 1 5 Properties of the Micro Memory Card  MMC     The MMC as memory module for the CPU    The memory module used on your CPU is a SIMATIC Micro Memory Card  MMC   You can  use MMCs as load memory or as a portable storage medium        Note  The CPU requires the MMC for operation        Data stored on the MMC    e User programs  all blocks    e Archives and recipes   e Configuration data  STEP 7 projects     e Data for operating system update and backup       Note  You can either store user and configuration data or the operating system on the MMC        Properties of an MMC    A    The MMC ensures maintenance free and retentive operation of these CPUs        Caution    Data on a SIMATIC Micro Memory Card can be corrupted if you remove the card while it is  being accessed by a write operation  In this case  you may have to delete the MMC on your  PG  or format the card in the CPU  Never remove an MMC in RUN mode  Always remove it  when power is off  or when the CPU is in STOP state  and when the PG is not a writing to  the card  When the CPU is in STOP mode and you cannot not determine whether or not a  PG is writing to the card  e g  load delete block   disconnect the communication lines        CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05 4 9    Memory concept       4 1 Memory areas and retentivity    MMC copy protection    You
48.  Timer  See Timers    Timers    Timers are part of CPU system memory  The content of timer cells is automatically updated  by the operating system  asynchronously to the user program  STEP 7 instructions are used  to define the precise function of the timer cell  for example  on delay  and to initiate their  execution  for example  start      TOD interrupt  See Interrupt  time of day    CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05 Glossary 21    Glossary       Token    Topology    Allows access to the bus for a limited time     Structure of a network  Common structures include   e Bus topology  e Ring topology  e Star topology  e Tree topology    Transmission rate    Twisted Pair    Ungrounded    User memory    User program    Varistor    Glossary 22    Data transfer rate  in bps     Fast Ethernet via twisted pair cables is based on the IEEE 802 3u standard  100 Base TX    The transmission medium is a 2x2 wire  twisted and shielded cable with a characteristic  impedance of 100 ohms  AWG 22   The transmission characteristics of this cable must meet  the requirements of category 5  see glossary      The maximum length of the connection between end device and network component must  not exceed 100 m  The ports are implemented according to the 100 Base TX standard with  the RJ 45 connector system     Having no direct electrical connection to ground    User memory contains the code blocks   data blocks of the user program  User memory can  be integ
49.  User data per request    max  76 bytes              Consistent data 76 bytes  S7 communication Yes  e As server Yes       e as client    Yes  via integrated PN interface and loadable  FBs  or even via CP and loadable FBs        e User data per request      Consistent data    See the STEP 7 Online Help  Common  parameters of SFBs FBs and SFC FC of the S7  communication         5 compatible communication    Yes  via CP and loadable FCs                       Number of connections 32  can be used for  e PG communication Max  31      Reserved  default  1      Configurable 1 to 31  e OP communication Max  31      Reserved  default  1      Configurable 1to31  e S7 based communication Max  30      Reserved  default  0      Configurable 0 to 30             CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05    Technical data of CPU 31x                                                                                                 7 7 CPU 317 2 PN DP   Technical data  Routing  e Interface X1 configured as Yes       MPI Max  10       DP master Max  24       DP slave  active  Max  14  e Interface X2 configured as       PROFINET Max  24  CBA  at 50   communication load   e Maximum data length for arrays and   structures between two partners       Acyclic PROFINET interconnections 1400 bytes       Cyclo FROEINET interconnections 450 bytes       Local interconnections   Slave dependent   e Number of coupled PROFIBUS devices 16  e Total of all master slave connecti
50.  and performance     Because PROFINET is an open standard  SIMATIC NET offers PROFINET ASICs for the  development of your old devices under the name ERTEC      The backplane bus is a serial data bus  It supplies power to the modules and is also used by  the modules to communicate with each other  Bus connectors interconnect the modules     CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05 Glossary 1    Glossary       Backup memory    Bus    Bus segment    Clock flag bits    Coaxial Cable    Code block    Backup memory ensures buffering of the memory areas of a CPU without backup battery  It  backs up a configurable number of timers  counters  flag bits  data bytes and retentive  timers  counters  flag bits and data bytes      A bus is a communication medium connecting several nodes  Data can be transferred via  serial or parallel circuits  that is  via electrical conductors or fiber optic     A bus segment is a self contained section of a serial bus system  Bus segments are  interconnected via repeaters     flag bit which can be used to generate clock pulses in the user program  1 byte per flag bit         Note    When operating with S7300 CPUs  make sure that the byte of the clock memory bit is not  overwritten in the user program        A coaxial cable  also known as  coax   is a metallic cabling system used in high frequency  transmission  for example as the antenna cable for radios and televisions as well as in  modern networks in which high da
51.  application program     CCP  OS           The response of the user program to the change  of the input signal is issued to the outputs        Delay of outputs    2 x DP cycle time at PROFIBUS DP    CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05 5 17    Cycle and reaction    times       5 3 Response time    Calculation    See also    5 3 4 Redu    The  longest  response time is the sum of     Table 5 11 Formula  Longest response time    2 x process image transfer time for the inputs   2 x process image transfer time for the outputs   2 X program processing time   2 x operating system processing time   2 X program processing time   4 x PROFINET IO update time  only if PROFINET IO is used     4 x DP cycle time on PROFIBUS DP  only if PROFIBUS DP is used    I O delay     Longest response time          t           Equivalent to the sum of 2 x the cycle time   I O delay time   4 x times the PROFINET IO  update time or 4 x times the DP cycle time on PROFIBUS DP     Overview  Page 5 14      cing the response time with direct I O access    Reducing the response time    You can reach faster response times with direct access to the I O in your user program  e g   with    e L PIBor  e T PQW    you can partially avoid the response times described above        Note  You can also achieve fast response times by using process interrupts        See also    5 18        Shortest response time  Pag       Longest response time  Pag    CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical
52.  as of V5 2   SP 1     please use previous CPU for STEP 7  V 5 1   SP 3 or later                    Memory CPU 314C 2 PtP CPU 314C 2 DP  RAM   e Integrated 48 KB   e Expandable No       Load memory    Plugged in with MMC  max  8 MB        Data storage life on the MMC   following final programming     At least 10 years       Buffering    Guaranteed by MMC  maintenance free        Execution times    CPU 314C 2 PtP       CPU 314C 2 DP       Processing times of                                              e Bit operations Min  0 1 us   e Word instructions Min  0 2 us   e Fixed point arithmetic Min  2 us   e Floating point arithmetic Min  6 us   Timers counters and their retentivity CPU 314C 2 PtP CPU 314C 2 DP  S7 counters 256   e Retentive memory Configurable   e Default from CO to C7   e Counting range 0 to 999   IEC Counters Yes   e Type SFB   e Number unlimited  limited only by RAM size   S7 timers 256       e Retentive memory    Configurable       e Default    Not retentive       e Timer range    10 ms to 9990 s                   IEC Timers Yes  e Type SFB  e Number unlimited  limited only by RAM size           CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05    6 21    Technical data of CPU 31xC       6 5 CPU 314C 2 PtP and CPU 314C 2 DP       Technical data       Data areas and their retentivity    CPU 314C 2 PtP  CPU 314C 2 PtP    CPU 314C 2 DP  CPU 314C 2 DP                      Flag bits 256 bytes  e Retentive memory Configurable  e Default 
53.  ccccceeceeeeeeeec cece eeeeeeeeeaaeceeeeeeeeeceeaaeceeeeeeeesescaacaeeeeeeeseescnaeaeeeeeeesseaaeeeeees  3 2 3 OP  COMIMUMIGATIOM siene iiaa a aaa deedaaadeatacdexceeaudddennnedtesdandaaanse  3 2 4 Data exchanged by means of S7 basic communication             ee eeeeeee eet eeeeeeteeeeeeetaeeeeeenaeeeeeeaaes  3 2 5 SL COMMUNICATION 55 sha ern casas a a a a A aa a E a a a EE  3 2 6 Global data communication  MPI Only  sasarina anan nananana AAAA AARAA  3 2 7 PROUD Gis cco E ence E E E ad age E P E caida ete sapae E E I A eel  3 2 8 PtP commuUmcati  N siaaa aaa a a a E a a a a  3 2 9 Data  CONSISLONCY s cccciscncceciisceces testiees cighecevinan doen AE EEE ETRA  3 2 10 Communication via PROFINET  only CPU 31x 2 PN DP   3 2 10 1 PROFINET 1O System           cccccceceeeceeceeceeeeeeeaeeeceeeeceaeeeceaeeesaaeeceeeeseaeeesaeeeseceeseeeescaeeesneeeeeeeeees  3 2 10 2 Blocks in PROFINET 10          0  ccccccceesceceeeeeeeaeeeceeeeceaeeeceaeeecaaeseeeesaeeesaaeeseeeeeseeeescaeeeeieeseeeeeeas  3 2 10 3 System status lists  SSLS  in PROFINET 10 ooo    eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseneaeeeeeeaeeees  3 2 10 4 Open communication via Industrial Ethernet        0        cceeeeeeecceceeeeeeeeeeceneeeeeeeeeseteeaeeeeeeeeeeeeteeea  3 2 10 5 SNMP communication service                 cccccccceeeeeecnececeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaeceeeeeeeceeeaeaeceeeeeeeeeseneneeeeeeeentee  3 3 SF COMNECUONS aa ai a a a a e a a a e a a eaa  3 3 1 S7 connection as communication path                ccccccceceeeeee
54.  communication can thus act as an S7 connection point  At the  connection point  the established communication link always uses one S7 connection of the  module concerned     If you use the routing functionality  the S7 connection between two modules capable of  communication is established across a number of subnets  These subnets are  interconnected via a network transition  The module that implements this network transition  is known as a router  The router is thus the point through which an S7 connection passes     Any CPU with a DP or PN interface can be the router for an S7 connection  You can  establish a certain maximum number of routing connections  This does not limit the data  volume of the S7 connections     Connection resources for routing  Page 3 31     3 3 2 Assignment of S7 connections    There are several ways to allocate S7 connections on a communication capable module   e Reservation during configuration   e Allocating connections via programming   e Allocating connections during commissioning  testing and diagnostics routines    e Allocating connection resources to OCMS services    Reservation during configuration    One connection resource each is automatically reserved on the CPU for PG and OP  communication  Whenever you need more connection resources  for example  when  connecting several OPs   configure this increase in the CPU properties dialog box in  STEP 7     Connections must also be configured  using NetPro  for the use of S7 communication  For 
55.  data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05    Cycle and reaction times       5 4    Introduction    Cycle time    5 4 Calculating method for calculating the cycle response time    Calculating method for calculating the cycle response time    This section gives you an overview of how to calculate the cycle response time       Determine the user program runtime with the help of the  ns  ruction list       Multiply the calculated value by the CPU specific factor from the table Extension of user    program processing time       Calculate and add the process image transfer time  Corresponding guide values are    found in table Data for calculating process image transfer time       Add the processing time at the scan cycle checkpoint  Corresponding guide values are    found in the table Operating system processing time at the scan cycle checkpoint       Include the extensions as a result of testing and commissioning functions as well as    cyclical PROFINET interconnections in your calculation  These values are found in the  table Cycle time extension due to testing and commissioning functions  The final result is  the cycle time     Extension of the cycle time as a result of interrupts and communication load    See also    100    100     configured communication load in       1   2     Multiply the cycle time by the factor as in the formula above     Calculate the runtime of interrupt processing program sections with the help of the  instruction list  Add the corresponding val
56.  different sides of a router can only communicate with each other if  you have explicitly enabled communication via the router between the two nodes     See Default Router  See Switch    See Real Time    Errors occurred in the PLC  that is  not in the process itself  during user program execution     See Bus segment    See System function block    See System function    CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05    Glossary       Signal module    Signal modules  SM  form the interface between the process and the PLC  There are digital  input and output modules  input output module  digital  and analog input and output modules   input output module  analog      SIMATIC  Name of products and systems for industrial automation from Siemens AG     SIMATIC NCM PC    SIMATIC NCM PC is a version of STEP 7 tailored to PC configuration  For PC stations  it  offers the full range of functions of STEP 7     SIMATIC NCM PC is the central tool with which you configure the communication services  for your PC station  The configuration data generated with this tool must be downloaded to  the PC station or exported  This makes the PC station ready for communication     SIMATIC NET    Siemens business area for industrial communication  networks  and network components     SIMATIC PC Station    A  PC station  is a PC with communication modules and software components within a  SIMATIC automation solution     Slave  A slave can only exchange data after being re
57.  e SFC12  deactivate and activate DP slaves    e SFC72  e SFC73  e SFC74  abort an existing connection to a communication partner within local S7 station     read data from a communication partner within local S7 station     write data to a communication partner within local S7 station                 Comparison of the Organization Blocks of PROFINET IO and PROFIBUS DP    Here  there are changes in OBs 83 and 86 as shown in the table below     Table 3 8 OBs in PROFINET IO and PROFIBUS DP       Blocks PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP   OB83  removing and inserting Also possible with an S7 300  With an S7 300 not possible  modules and submodules new error information Removing and inserting during  during operation  operation is reported by slaves    added using a GSD file by  means of a diagnostic interrupt   in other words OB82    With S7 slaves  OB86 is called  due to the station failure                    OB86  rack failure  New error information Unchanged       Detailed Information    For detailed descriptions of the individual blocks  refer to the manual System Software for  S7 300 400 System and Standard Functions     CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  3 22 Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05    Communication       3 2 10 3    3 2 Communication services    System status lists  SSLs  in PROFINET IO    Chapter Content    This chapter explains the following    e Which SSLs are intended for PROFINET   e Which SSLs are intended for PROFIBUS DP   e Which SSLs are intended for bot
58.  ee tenets ee ea anaes seta ae ee ee taaeee ee saaeee ee saeeeeeeeeeeneea 1 3  TONNO ie cereras ct erat tyes R E E E E E 1 3  Supplementary fe  tUre Sisan ardei aa a a i a aa aa E EE 1 4  Positions of the mode selector switch      ss sssiininrnninannaniinnn anainn nn anina ANNAA NNR AN ARAARA AN 2 3  Differ  nces of the CPUS STRO cruisin naaa a Aa AEAEE 2 3  Positions of the mode selector switch           ssssesssrresssnnesnsnnnerannnneennantnnnnaanennnenannanennaaaannaaeennaananna 2 6  Positions of the mode selector switch 0 00    cece eeteeeee entree ce eeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaaeeeeneaeeeeeeaas 2 8  Positions of the mode selector switch            cece ceeeeeee eee eeeeteeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeeeseneeeeesenaeeeteenaeees 2 10  General status and error displays of the CPU 31X oo    ecccceeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeteeeaeeeseeeaees 2 11   Bus error displays of CPU 31X i   sccecccsdtened claneseeessdiedcesieriesvedids es eetie evens E landed 2 11   Operating modes for CPUs with two DP interfaces 00 0 2    ececeeeeeneeeeeeeneeeeeeeneeeeeetaeeeeetnaeeeeees 3 2  Communication services of the CPUS            cececeeeeeeeeeene ee ee eeneeeeeeaeeeeetaeeeseetaeeeeetaeeeeesnaeeeenes 3 6  Client and server in S7 communication  using connections with unilateral     bilateral COMMGUPATION  isccc ce Hececesiedeccessnedeveuvaliceecuanieesdusiicedsddineceevinteeviihdeeessbnieeesvitteessbuneevebnneee 3 8  GD resources  of the CPUS  oricarei iisi inani EANN eN a ETEA Ni 3 10  Number 
59.  entire contents  user program and project  data  using the Save project to memory card action        CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05 4 19    Memory concept       4 2 Memory functions    CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  4 20 Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05    Cycle and reaction times 5    5 1 Overview    Overview  This section contains detailed information about the following topics   e Cycle time  e Reaction time  e Interrupt response time    e Sample calculations    Reference  Cycle time    You can view the cycle time of your user program on the PG  For further information  refer to  the STEP 7 Online Help  or to the Configuring Hardware and Connections in STEP 7 Manual    Reference  Execution time    can be found in the S7 300 Instruction List for CPUs 31xC and 31x  This tabular list contains  the execution times for all    e STEP 7 instructions the relevant CPU can execute   e the SFCs   SFBs integrated in the CPUs   e the IEC functions which can be called in STEP 7     CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05 5 1    Cycle and reaction times  5 2 Cycle time       5 2 Cycle time    5 2 1 Overview    Introduction    This section explains what we mean by the term  cycle time   what it consists of  and how  you can calculate it     Meaning of the term cycle time    The cycle time represents the time that an operating system needs to execute a program   that is  one OB 1 cycle  incl
60.  flag bits M  inputs    outputs Q  timers  counters and data blocks DB  Global data can be  accessed via absolute or symbolic addressing     Global data communication    Ground    Global data communication is a method of transferring global data between CPUs  without  CFBs      The conductive earth whose electrical potential can be set equal to zero at any point     Ground potential can be different from zero in the area of grounding electrodes  The term  reference ground is frequently used to describe this situation     Grounding means  to connect an electrically conductive component via an equipotential  grounding system to a grounding electrode  one or more conductive components with highly  conductive contact to earth      CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05 Glossary 7    Glossary       Chassis ground is the totality of all the interconnected passive parts of a piece of equipment  on which dangerous fault voltage cannot occur     GSD file    The properties of a PROFINET device are described in a GSD file  General Station  Description  that contains all the information required for configuration     Just as in PROFIBUS  you can integrate a PROFINET device in STEP 7 using a GSD file     In PROFINET IO  the GSD file is in XML format  The structure of the GSD file complies with  ISO 15734  the worldwide standard for device descriptions     In PROFIBUS  the GSD file is in ASCII format     Hub    In contrast to a switch  a hub sets itse
61.  following final programming     At least 10 years       Execution times       Processing times of                      e Bit operations 0 1 us  e Word instructions 0 2 us  e Fixed point arithmetic 2 us   e Floating point arithmetic 6 us  Timers counters and their retentivity   S7 counters 256       e Retentive memory    Configurable                         e Default from CO to C7  e Counting range 0 to 999  IEC Counters Yes  e Type SFB  e Number Unlimited   limited only by RAM size   S7 timers 256  e Retentive memory Configurable       e Default    Not retentive          e Timer range          10 ms to 9990 s       CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05    7 19    Technical data of CPU 31x       7 5 CPU 315 2 PN DP    7 20       Technical data          IEC Timers Yes  e Type SFB  e Number Unlimited     limited only by RAM size        Data areas and their retentivity       Flag bits    2048 bytes       e Retentive memory    Configurable       e Default retentivity    From MBO to MB15       Clock flag bits    8  1 byte per flag bit                 Data blocks  e Number 1023   DB 1 to DB 1023   e Length 16 KB  e Non Retain support  configured retention  Yes       Local data per priority class    Max  1024 bytes per run level   510 bytes per  block                                           Blocks   Total 1024  DBs  FCs  FBs   The maximum number of blocks that can be  loaded may be reduced if you are using another  MMC    OBs See the Instruc
62.  have replaced the CPU  simply  plug the connecting plug back into the power supply connector     CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  A 6 Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05    Appendix       A 1 8    Consistent data    A 1 Information about upgrading to a CPU 31xC or CPU 31x    Using consistent data areas in the process image of a DP slave system    The table below illustrates the points to consider with respect to communication in a DP  master system if you want to transfer I O areas with  Total length  consistency  You can  transfer a maximum of 128 bytes of consistent data        Table A 1 Consistent data  CPU 315 2 DP CPU 315 2 DP CPU 318 2 DP   as of firmware 2 0 0    as of firmware 1 0 0    firmware  gt   3 0   CPU 317  CPU 316 2 DP   CPU 31xC CPU 318 2 DP  firmware  lt  3 0     The address area of consistent  data in the process image is  automatically updated     To read and write consistent  data  you can also use SFC 14  and SFC 15  If the address area  of consistent data is not in the  process image  you must use  SFC 14 and SFC 15 to read  and write consistent data    Direct access to consistent    areas is also possible  e g   L PEW or T PAW         Even if they exist in the process  image  consistent data is not  automatically updated     You can choose whether or not  to update the address area of  consistent data in the process  image           To read and write consistent data     you must use SFC 14 and 15        To read and write consistent  data  yo
63.  point arithmetic 1 0 us   Timers counters and their retentivity   S7 counters 512   e Retentive memory Configurable   e Default from CO to C7   e Counting range 0 to 999   IEC Counters Yes   e Type SFB   e Number Unlimited   limited only by RAM size    S7 timers 512   e Retentive memory Configurable       e Default    Not retentive          e Timer range          10 ms to 9990 s       CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05    7 33    Technical data of CPU 31x       7 7 CPU 317 2 PN DP    7 34       Technical data          IEC Timers Yes  e Type SFB  e Number Unlimited     limited only by RAM size        Data areas and their retentivity       Flag bits    4096 bytes       e Retentive memory    Configurable       e Default retentivity    From MBO to MB15       Clock flag bits    8  1 byte per flag bit                 Data blocks  e Number 2047   DB 1 to DB 2047   e Length 64 KB  e Non Retain support  configured retention  Yes       Local data per priority class    max  1024 bytes                                           Blocks   Total 2048  DBs  FCs  FBs   The maximum number of blocks that can be  loaded may be reduced if you are using another  MMC    OBs See the Instruction List   e Length 64 KB   Nesting depth   e Per priority class 16   e additional within an error OB 4   FBs See the Instruction List   e Number 2048   FB 0 to FB 2047    e Length 64 KB   FCs See the Instruction List   e Number 2048   FC 0 to FC 2047    e Length 64 KB  
64.  preparation time   input delay    The internal interrupt preparation time for analog input modules can be neglected  The  conversion times can be found in the data sheet for the individual analog input modules     The diagnostic interrupt response time of signal modules is equivalent to the period that  expires between the time a signal module detects a diagnostic event and the time this signal  module triggers the diagnostic interrupt  This short time can be neglected     CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05    Cycle and reaction times       5 5 Interrupt response time    Process interrupt processing    See also    Process interrupt processing begins after process interrupt OB40 is called  Higher priority  interrupts stop process interrupt processing  Direct I O access is executed during runtime of  the instruction  After process interrupt processing has terminated  cyclic program execution  continues or further interrupt OBs of equal or lower priority are called and processed     Overview  Page 5 1     5 5 2 Reproducibility of delay interrupts and watchdog interrupts    Definition of  Reproducibility     Reproducibility    Delay interrupt     The period that expires between the call of the first instruction in the interrupt OB and the  programmed time of interrupt     Watchdog interrupt     The fluctuation width of the interval between two successive calls  measured between the  respective initial instructions of the interrupt OBs  
65.  program is not time critical     e Inall other situations you should only reduce this value     CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05    Cycle and reaction times       5 2 5    Runtimes    5 2 Cycle time    Cycle time extension as a result of testing and commissioning functions    The runtimes of the testing and commissioning functions are operating system runtimes  so  they are the same for every CPU  Initially  there is no difference between process mode and  testing mode  How the cycle time is extended as a result of active testing and commissioning  functions is shown in the table below     Table 5 9 Cycle time extension as a result of testing and commissioning functions                      Function CPU 31xC  CPU 31x   Status variable 50 us for each variable  Control variable 50 us for each variable   Block status 200 us for each monitored line       Configuration during parameter assignment    5 2 6    Reference    For process operation  the maximum permissible cycle load by communication is not  specified in  Cycle load by communication   but rather in  Maximum permitted increase of  cycle time as a result of testing functions during process operation   Thus  the configured  time is monitored absolutely in process mode and data acquisition is stopped if a timeout  occurs  This is how STEP 7 stops data requests in loops before a loop ends  for example   When running in Testing mode  the complete loop is executed in every cycle  T
66.  start of the cycle  and restarts cycle time monitoring                 y           V                                   Process image of outputs D   PIO   Time slices  1 ms each  s  Process image of inputs    3   PIN    Ss if  Q  User program    Cycle control point  CCP  6  y          Operating system  OS  7        Time slice  1 ms  i                Operating system       User program               Communications       In contrast to S7 400 CPUs  the S7 300 CPUs data only allow data access from an OP   TP   monitor and modify functions  at the scan cycle check point  Data consistency  see the  Technical Data   Processing of the user program is not interrupted by the monitor and modify  functions     CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05 5 3    Cycle and reaction times       5 2 Cycle time    Extending the cycle time    5 4    Always make allowances for the extension of the cycle time of a user program due to   e Time based interrupt processing   e Process interrupt processing   e Diagnostics and error processing    e Communication with PGs  Operator Panels  OPs  and connected CPs  for example   Ethernet  PROFIBUS DP     e Testing and commissioning such as  e g  status controlling of variables or block status  functions     e Transfer and deletion of blocks  compressing user program memory  e Write read access to the MMC  using SFC 82 to 84 in the user program  e Ethernet communication via integrated PROFINET interface    e CBA communica
67.  this purpose  connection resources have to be available  which are not allocated to PG OP  or other connections  The required S7 connections are then permanently allocated for   S7 communication when the configuration is uploaded to the CPU     CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05 3 27    Communication       3 3 S7 connections    Assigning connections in the program    In S7 basic communication  and in open Industrial Ethernet communication with TCP IP  the  user program establishes the connection  The CPU operating system initiates the  connection  S7 basic communication uses the corresponding S7 connections  The open   IE communication does not use any S7 connections  The maximum number of eight  connections also applies to this type of communication     Using connections for commissioning  testing and diagnostics    An active online function on the engineering station  PG PC with STEP 7  occupies  S7 connections for PG communication     e An S7 connection resource for PG communication which was reserved in your CPU  hardware configuration is assigned to the engineering station  that is  it only needs to be  allocated     e lf all reserved S7 connection resources for PG communication are allocated  the  operating system automatically assigns a free S7 connection resource which has not yet  been reserved  If no more connection resources are available  the engineering station  cannot go online to the CPU     Allocating connection reso
68.  to a CPU 31xC or CPU 31x       A 1 4 Runtimes that change while the program is running    Runtimes that change while the program is running    If you have created a user program that has been fine tuned in relation to certain processing  times  please note the following points if you are using a CPU 31xC 31x     e the program will run much faster on the CPU 31xC 31x     e Functions that require MMC access  e g  system start up time  program download in  RUN  return of DP station  etc   may sometimes run slower on the CPU 31xC 31x     A 1 5 Converting the diagnostic addresses of DP slaves    Converting the diagnostic addresses of DP slaves    If you are using a CPU 31xC 31x with DP interface as the master  please note that you may  have to reassign the diagnostic addresses for the slaves since the changes to the DPV1  standard sometimes require two diagnostic addresses per slave     e The virtual slot 0 has its own address  diagnostic address of the station proxy   The  module status data for this slot  read SSL 0xD91 with SFC 51  RDSYSST   contains IDs  that relate to the entire slave station  e g  the station error ID  Failure and restoration of  the station are also signaled in OB86 on the master via the diagnostic address of the  virtual slot 0     e Atsome of the slaves the interface module is also modeled as a separate virtual slot  for  example  CPU as an intelligent slave or IM153   and a suitable separate address is  assigned to virtual slot 2    The change of operat
69.  with DP interface  MMC 8M1   6ES7 953 8LPxx OAAO      1 This MMC cannot be used together with CPU 312C or CPU 312                                   Maximum number of loadable blocks in the MMC    The number of blocks that can be stored on the MMC depends on the capacity of the MMC  being used  The maximum number of blocks that can be loaded is therefore limited by the  capacity of your MMC  including blocks generated with the  CREATE DB  SFC      Table 7 2 Maximum number of loadable blocks on the MMC                               Size of MMC Maximum number of blocks that can be loaded  64 KB 768  128 KB 1024  512 KB Here the maximum number of blocks that can be loaded for the  2MB specific CPU is less than the number of blocks that can be stored on  JMB the MMC   Refer to the corresponding specifications of a specific CPU to  8 MB determine the maximum number of blocks that can be loaded        CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  7 2 Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05    Technical data of CPU 31x                                                                                                       7 2 CPU 312  7 2 CPU 312  Technical data   Table 7 3 Technical data for the CPU 312   Technical data   CPU and version   Order number 6ES7312 1AD10 0ABO   e Hardware version 01   e Firmware version V2 0 0   e Associated programming package STEP 7 as of V5 1 SP4   Memory   RAM   e Integrated 16 KB   e Expandable No   Load memory Plugged in with MMC  max  4 MB   Data storage li
70. 0  Communication functions  PG OP communication Yes  Global data communication Yes  e Number of GD circuits 4  e Number of GD packets Max  4      Sending stations Max  4      Receiving stations Max  4  e Length of GD packets max  22 bytes      Consistent data 22 bytes  S7 basic communication Yes       e User data per request  e Consistent data    max  76 bytes  76 bytes  for X_SEND or X_RCV   64 bytes  for X_PUT or X_GET as the server        S7 communication                                     e As server Yes  e User data per request max  180 bytes  with PUT GET       Consistent data 64 bytes   5 compatible communication Yes  via CP and loadable FCs   Number of connections Max  6  can be used for  e PG communication Max  5      Reserved  default  1      Configurable from 1to5  e OP communication Max  5      Reserved  default  1      Configurable from 1 to 5  e S7 based communication Max  2      Reserved  default  2      Configurable from 0 to 2  Routing No  Interfaces       1st interface       Type of interface    Integrated RS485 interface                Physics RS 485  electrically isolated No  Interface power supply Max  200 mA     15 to 30 VDC              CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05    Technical data of CPU 31xC                                                                                                                         6 2 CPU 312C  Technical data  Functionality  e MPI Yes  e PROFIBUS DP No  e Point to point co
71. 130  1L   DO Vo 14    DO 0 0  DO v1 15   DO 0 1  DO 16   DO 0 2  DO 17    DO 0 3  DO 18  DO 0 4  DO 19   DO 0 5  2009  1M  Zn Counter n  A  B Encoder signals  Vn Comparator n  x Pin usable if not assigned to technology functions    HW gate Gate control  Latch Store counter distance    CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  6 28 Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05    Technical data of CPU 31xC  6 6 Technical data of the integrated I O       Block diagram of the integrated digital I O                      1  o      2   3                                                    f  i  S    CPU interface                                                                                                                                                                                                  lt   15    ot      lt J i   lt   i  o  il 18 a    19 z Vi                          1M       CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05 6 29    Technical data of CPU 31xC       6 6 Technical data of the integrated   O    CPU 313C  CPU 313C 2 DP PtP  CPU 314C 2 DP PtP  DI DO  connectors X11 and X12     X11 of CPU 313C 2 PtP DP  X12 of CPU 314C 2 PtP DP    a oe                                                                                                    Standard  Interrupt  Count Posi  Yee      Positioning 1   Count   Standard  DI input tioning   141  41L  2L    21  Digital   Analog DO  X X Zo  A  AO 2  DI 0 0   DO 0 0      22 Vo x  X X Z0  B  BO 39  Di 0 1 
72. 14C 2       Status display    green LED per channel       Interrupts    e no interrupts when operated as standard I O  e For using technological functions  please refer to the Technological    Functions Manual        Diagnostics functions          no diagnostics when operated as standard I O    For using technological functions  please refer to the Technological    Functions Manual           CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05    6 49    Technical data of CPU 31xC       6 6 Technical data of the integrated I O       Technical data                          Rated value      Permitted range    CPU 312C CPU 313C CPU 313C 2 CPU 314C 2  Data for the selection of an actuator for CPU 312C CPU 313C CPU 313C 2 CPU 314C 2  standard DI  Output voltage  e For signal  1  Min  L    0 8 V   Output current  e For signal  1  0 5A    5 mA to 600 mA                                        e For signal  0   residual current  Max  0 5 mA  Load impedance range 48 Q to 4 kQ  Lamp load Max  5 W  Parallel connection of 2 outputs   e for redundant load control Possible   e for performance increase Not possible  Controlling of digital inputs Possible  Switching frequency   e under resistive load Max  100 Hz  e For inductive load to IEC 947 5  DC13 Max  0 5 Hz  e under lamp load Max  100 Hz  e fast outputs under resistive load Max  2 5 kHz       Inductive breaking voltage limited internally to    Typically  L     48 V       Short circuit protection of the output  
73. 15 to 30 VDC   Functionality  e MPI Yes  e PROFIBUS DP Yes  e Point to point communication No  MPI  Services  e PG OP communication Yes  e Routing Yes  e Global data communication Yes  e S7 basic communication Yes  e S7 communication       As server Yes     As client No  but via CP and loadable FBs   e Transmission rates Max  12 Mbps  DP master  Services  e PG OP communication Yes  e Routing Yes  e Global data communication No  e S7 basic communication No  e S7 communication No  e Constant bus cycle time Yes  e SYNC FREEZE Yes  e DPV1 Yes             CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05    Technical data of CPU 31x       7 6 CPU 317 2 DP       Technical data    Transmission speed    Up to 12 Mbps       Number of DP slaves    124       Address range per DP slave       max  244 bytes       DP slave   except for DP slave at both interfaces        Services                   e Routing Yes  only if interface is active   e Global data communication No   e S7 basic communication No   e S7 communication No   e Direct data exchange Yes       e Transmission rates    Up to 12 Mbps       e Automatic baud rate search    Yes  only if interface is passive        e Intermediate memory    244 bytes    244 bytes O       e Address areas    max  32 with max  32 bytes each       e DPV1    No       2nd interface       Type of interface    Integrated RS485 interface                                                                Physics RS 485  electrically is
74. 16  Global data a a  S7 basic ewe an tion  3 7 7  S7 communication  3 8  Communication load  configured   Dependency of physical cycle time  5 10   Influence on the SSG ce le time a mele  Communications concept  3 17  Glossary 16_    Component Based automation  3 17  Glossary 15  Compression  4 13    Configuration    Interrupt input 6 39  Standard Al  641    Standard DI  6 39   Standard DO     Technological functions  6 44                  CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05    ae data     CPU 312   ea data  6 3   7 3  7 8  7 8  7   Usage of integrated I Os ag  CPU 313C   Technical data    Usage of integrated I Os  6 6 30    CPU 313C 2 DP   Technical data    Usage of integrated I Os  6 16 30   CPU 313C 2 PtP   Technical data    Usage of integrated I Os  6 16 30   CPU 314C 2 DP   Technical data    Usage of Nea Se I Os  6 16 30   CPU 314C 2 aa   Technical data   6 21     Usage of e rr ia  6 30   4  4 13    CPU memory reset     CPUs 31xC  Differences   Cycle time    Calculation 5 5    Definition  5 2   Extension     Maximum cycle time  5 9   Process image  5 2   Sample calculation  5 24     Sequence of cyclic program processing     Time slice model  5 2      7 26  7 33    Index 1    Index       D  Data consistency  3 16  Diagnostics    Standard I O  6 46  Technological functions  6 46   Differences between the CPUs    Digital inputs  Configuration  6 39   Technical data  6 47   Digital outputs    Configura tion  6 41      Fast     Techni
75. 4 13    Memory concept       4 2 Memory functions    Restart  warm start     Reference    4 14    All retentive DBs retain their actual value  non retentive DBs are also supported by CPUs  with Firmware  gt   V2 1 0  Non retentive DBs receive their initial values      The values of all retentive M  C  T are retained   All non retentive user data are initialized        M C  T  1  O with  0    All run levels are initialized     The process images are deleted     Also refer to CPU memory reset by means mode selector switch in the section  Commissioning in the CPU 31xC and CPU 31x Operating Instructions     CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05    Memory concept       4 2 Memory functions    4 2 5 Recipes    Introduction    A recipe represents a collection of user data  You can implement a simple recipe concept  using static DBs  In this case  the recipes should have the same structure  length   One DB  should exist per recipe     Processing sequence    Recipe is written to load memory     The various data records of recipes are created as static DBs in STEP 7 and then  downloaded to the CPU  Therefore  recipes only use load memory  rather than RAM     Working with recipe data     SFC83  READ_DBL  is called in the user program to copy the data record of a current  recipe from the DB in load memory to a static DB that is located in work memory  As a  result  the RAM only has to accommodate the data of one record  The user program can  now ac
76. 5 4 7    Memory concept       4 1 Memory areas and retentivity    Local data    See also    4 8    Local data store    e the temporary variables of code blocks  e the start information of the OBs   e transfer parameters   e intermediate results   Temporary Variables    When you create blocks  you can declare temporary variables  TEMP  which are only  available during block execution and then overwritten again  These local data have fixed  length in each OB  Local data must be initialized prior to the first read access  Each OB also  requires 20 bytes of local data for its start information  Local data access is faster compared  to access to data in DBs     The CPU is equipped with memory for storing temporary variables  local data  of currently  executed blocks  The size of this memory area depends on the CPU  It is distributed in  partitions of equal size to the priority classes  Each priority class has its own local data area        Caution    All temporary variables  TEMP  of an OB and its nested blocks are stored in local data   When using complex nesting levels for block processing  you may cause an overflow in the  local data area    The CPUs will change to STOP mode if you exceed the permissible length of local data for a  priority class    Make allowances for local data space required for synchronous error OBs  This is assigned  to the respective triggering priority class        Retentivity of the load memory  system memory and RAM  Pag e 4 2     CPU 31xC and CPU 31x 
77. 5475 05    Technical data of CPU 31xC       6 4 CPU 313C 2 PtP and CPU 313C 2 DP       Technical data       Data areas and their retentivity    CPU 313C 2 PtP  CPU 313C 2 PtP    CPU 313C 2 DP  CPU 313C 2 DP                      Flag bits 256 bytes  e Retentive memory Configurable  e Default retentivity MBO to MB15  Clock flag bits 8  1 byte per flag bit   Data blocks Max  511   DB 1 to DB 511   e Length max  16 KB       Local data per priority class    max  510 bytes                                        Blocks CPU 313C 2 PtP CPU 313C 2 DP  Total 1024  DBs  FCs  FBs   The maximum number of blocks that can be loaded may be reduced if you are  using another MMC   OBs see the Instruction List  e Length max  16 KB  Nesting depth  e Per priority class 8  e additional within an error OB 4  FBs Max  512   FB 0 to FB 511   e Length max  16 KB  FCs Max  512   FC 0 to FC 511   e Length max  16 KB  Address areas  I O  CPU 313C 2 PtP CPU 313C 2 DP       Total I O address area    max  1024 bytes 1024 bytes   can be freely addressed     max  1024 bytes 1024 bytes   can be freely addressed                                      e Distributed None max  1008 bytes  I O process image 128 bytes 128 bytes 128 bytes 128 bytes  Digital channels Max  1008 Max  8192   e of those local Max  992 Max  992   e Integrated channels 16 DI  16 DO 16 DI 16 DO  Analog channels Max  248 Max  512   e of those local Max  248 Max  248   e Integrated channels None None   Assembly CPU 313C 2 PtP CPU 313C 2 DP  Racks
78. 6 5 CPU 314C 2 PtP and CPU 314C 2 DP       Technical data       Number of function modules and  communication processors you can  operate    CPU 314C 2 PtP CPU 314C 2 DP                e FM Max  8   e CP  PtP  Max  8   e CP  LAN  Max  10   Time of day CPU 314C 2 PtP CPU 314C 2 DP          Real time clock    Yes  HW clock        e Buffered    Yes       e Buffered period    Typically 6 weeks  at an ambient temperature of 40   C        e Behavior of the clock on expiration  of the buffered period    The clock keeps running  continuing at the time of day it had when power was  switched off        e Accuracy    Deviation per day  lt  10s       Operating hours counter    1             e Number 0  e Value range 2 31 hours    if SFC 101 is used   e Granularity 1 hour       e Retentive    Yes  must be manually restarted after every restart             Clock synchronization Yes  e Inthe PLC Master  e OnMPI Master slave       S7 signaling functions    CPU 314C 2 PtP CPU 314C 2 DP          Number of stations that can log in for  signaling functions  e g  OS     Max  12     depends on the number of connections configured for PG   OP and S7 basic  communication        Process diagnostics messages    Yes       e Simultaneously enabled interrupt S  blocks    Max  40       Testing and commissioning functions       CPU 314C 2 PtP CPU 314C 2 DP       Status control variables    Yes       e Variables    Inputs  outputs  memory bits  DBs  timers  counters          e Number of variables Max  30   
79. 6 KB   FCs Max  512   FC Oto FC 511   e Length max  16 KB       Address areas  I O        Total I O address area    1024 bytes  1024 bytes   can be freely addressed        I O process image    128 bytes 128 bytes                               Digital channels Max  256  of those local Max  256  Analog channels Max  64  of those local Max  64  Assembly   Racks Max  1  Modules per rack Max  8  Number of DP masters   e Integrated None          e Via CP          1       CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05    Technical data of CPU 31x       7 2 CPU 312       Technical data    Number of function modules and communication  processors you can operate                e FM Max  8  e CP  PtP  Max  8  e CP  LAN  Max  4  Time of day       Real time clock    Yes  SW clock        e Buffered    No       e Accuracy    Deviation per day  lt  15s       e Behavior of the realtime clock after POWER  ON    The clock keeps running  continuing at the time   of day it had when power was switched off        Operating hours counter    1             e Number 0  e Value range 231    if SFC 101 is used   e Granularity 1 hour       e Retentive    Yes  must be manually restarted after every  restart             Clock synchronization Yes  e Inthe PLC Master  e On MPI Master slave       S7 signaling functions       Number of stations that can be logged on for  signaling functions    6     depends on the number of connections  configured for PG   OP and S7 basic  communi
80. 7 us   approx  0 3 ms  Operating system runtime at the scan cycle checkpoint     approx  0 5 ms    The sum of the listed times is equivalent to the cycle time     Cycle time   11 0 ms   0 7 ms   0 3 ms   0 5 ms   12 5 ms     CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05 5 25    Cycle and reaction times       5 6 Sample calculations    Calculating the physical cycle time  Under consideration of communication load   12 5 ms   100    100 40    20 8 ms     Thus  under consideration of time sharing factors  the actual cycle time is 21 ms     Calculation of the longest response time    e Longest response time   21 ms   2   42 ms   e I O delay    The maximum delay of the input digital module SM 321  DI 32 x 24 VDC is 4 8 ms per  channel     The output delay of the digital output module SM 322  DO 16 x 24 VDC 0 5 A can be  neglected     The analog input module SM 331  Al 8 x 12 bit was configured for an interference  suppression at 50 Hz  The result is a conversion time of 22 ms per channel  With the  eight active channels  the result is a cycle time of 176 ms for the analog input module     The analog output module SM 332  AO 4 x 12 bit was programmed for the measuring  range of 0    10 Hz  This gives a conversion time of 0 8 ms per channel  Since   4 channels are active  the result is a cycle time of 3 2 ms  A settling time of 0 1 ms for  a resistive load must be added to this value  The result is a response time of 3 3 ms  for an analog output     e
81. 75 05    Memory concept  4 2 Memory functions       4 2 3 3 Deleting blocks    Deleting blocks    When you delete a block  it is deleted from load memory  In STEP 7  you can also delete  blocks with the user program  DBs also with SFC 23  DEL_DB    RAM used by this block is  released     4 2 3 4 Compressing blocks    Compressing blocks    When data are compressed  gaps which have developed between memory objects in load  memory RAM as a result of load delete operations will be eliminated  This releases free  memory in a continuous block  Data compression is possible when the CPU is in RUN or in  STOP     4 2 3 5 Promming  RAM to ROM     Promming  RAM to ROM     When writing the RAM content to ROM  the actual values of the DBs are transferred from  RAM to load memory to form the start values for the DBs        Note    This function is only permitted when the CPU is in STOP mode  Load memory is cleared if  the function could not be completed due to power loss        4 2 4 CPU memory reset and restart    CPU memory reset    After the insertion removal of a Micro Memory Card  a CPU memory reset restores defined  conditions for CPU restart  warm start   A CPU memory reset rebuilds the CPU s memory  management  Blocks in load memory are retained  All dynamic runtime blocks are  transferred once again from load memory to RAM  in particular to initialize the data blocks in  RAM  restore initial values      CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05 
82. A5E00105475 05    Technical data of CPU 31xC       6 7 General technical data    6 1 2 Technical data of the Micro Memory Card  MMC     Plug in SIMATIC Micro Memory Cards  The following memory modules are available     Table 6 1 Available MMCs       Type Order number Required for a firmware update via MMC   MMC 64k 6ES7 953 8LFxx OAAO     MMC 128k   6ES7 953 8LGxx OAAO      MMC 512k   6ES7 953 8LJxx OAA0     MMC 2M 6ES7 953 8LLxx OAA0O Minimum requirement for CPUs without DP interface  MMC 4M 6ES7 953 8LMxx OAAO Minimum requirement for CPUs with DP interface  MMC 8M1   6ES7 953 8LPxx OAAO      1 This MMC cannot be used together with CPU 312C or CPU 312                                   Maximum number of loadable blocks in the MMC    The number of blocks that can be stored on the MMC depends on the capacity of the MMC  being used  The maximum number of blocks that can be loaded is therefore limited by the  capacity of your MMC  including blocks generated with the  CREATE DB  SFC      Table 6 2 Maximum number of loadable blocks on the MMC                               Size of MMC Maximum number of blocks that can be loaded  64 KB 768  128 KB 1024  512 KB Here the maximum number of blocks that can be loaded for the  2MB specific CPU is less than the number of blocks that can be stored on  JMB the MMC   Refer to the corresponding specifications of a specific CPU to  8 MB determine the maximum number of blocks that can be loaded        CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  6 2 Man
83. ABO V2 1 0 01   317 2 PN DP 6ES7317 2EJ10 0ABO V2 3 0 01       Reference    If you intend to migrate from PROFIBUS DP to PROFINET  we also recommend the  following manual  Guide  From PROFIBUS DP to PROFINET  O    See also  DPV1  Page 3 32     A 1 2 Changed behavior of certain SFCs    SFC 56  SFC 57 and SFC 13 which work asynchronously    Some of the SFCs that work asynchronously  when used on CPUs 312IFM     318 2 DP  were  always  or under certain conditions  processed after the first call   quasi synchronous       On the 31xC 31x CPUs these SFCs actually run asynchronously  Asynchronous processing  may cover multiple OB1 cycles  As a result  a wait loop may turn into an endless loop within  an OB     The following SFCs are affected   e SFC 56  WR_DPARM   SFC 57  PARM_MOD     On CPUs 312 IFM to 318 2 DP  these SFCs always work  quasi synchronously  during  communication with centralized I O modules and always work synchronously during  communication with distributed I O modules     CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  A 2 Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05    Appendix       A 1 Information about upgrading to a CPU 31xC or CPU 31x       Note    If you are using SFC 56  WR_DPARM  or SFC 57  PARM_MOD   you should always  evaluate the SFC s BUSY bit        e SFC 13  DPNRM_DG     On CPUs 312 IFM to 318 2 DP  this SFC always works  quasi synchronously  when it is  called in OB82  On CPUs 31xC 31x it generally works asynchronously        Note    In the user program  the job 
84. C 2 DP    CPU 313C 2 DP       Order number    6ES7 313 6BE01 0ABO 6ES7 313 6CE01 0ABO       e Hardware version    01 01       e Firmware version    V2 0 0 V2 0 0       Associated programming package    STEP 7 as of V 5 2   SP 1 STEP 7 as of V5 2   SP 1     please use previous CPU for STEP7    please use previous CPU for STEP 7  V 5 1   SP 3 or later  V 5 1   SP 3 or later                    Memory CPU 313C 2 PtP CPU 313C 2 DP  RAM   e Integrated 32 KB   e Expandable No       Load memory    Plugged in with MMC  max  8 MB        Data storage life on the MMC   following final programming     At least 10 years       Buffering    Guaranteed by MMC  maintenance free        Execution times    CPU 313C 2 PtP CPU 313C 2 DP          Processing times of                         e Bit operations min  0 1 us   e Word instructions min  0 2 us   e Fixed point arithmetic min  2 us   e Floating point arithmetic min  6 us   Timers counters and their retentivity CPU 313C 2 PtP CPU 313C 2 DP  S7 counters 256       e Retentive memory    Configurable                         e Default from CO to C7   e Counting range 0 to 999   IEC Counters Yes   e Type SFB   e Number unlimited  limited only by RAM size   S7 timers 256   e Retentive memory Configurable       e Default    Not retentive       e Timer range    10 ms to 9990 s                      IEC Timers Yes  e Type SFB  e Number unlimited  limited only by RAM size        6 14    CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E0010
85. CCP  PIO PII                     CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05    Cycle and reaction times  5 2 Cycle time       Maximum cycle time    In STEP 7you can modify the default maximum cycle time  OB80 is called on when this time  expires  In this block you can specify the CPUs response to this timeout error  The CPU  switches to STOP mode if OB80 does not exist in its memory     5 2 4 Communication load    Configured communication load for PG OP communication  S7 communication and CBA    The CPU operating system continuously provides a specified percentage of total CPU  processing performance  time sharing technology  for communication tasks  Processing  performance not required for communication is made available to other processes  In HW  Config  you can specify a communication load value between 5  and 50   Default value is  20      You can use the following formula for calculating the cycle time extension factor     100    100     configured communication load in       Time slice  1 ms             Interruption  Operating system of user program  User program  Share can be configured  between 5   and 50         Communications       Example  20   communication load    In your hardware configuration  you have specified a communication load of 20    The  calculated cycle time is 10 ms  Using the above formula  the cycle time is extended by the  factor 1 25     Example  50   communication load    In your hardware configuration  you hav
86. Data areas and their retentivity                                                          Flag bits 128 bytes   e Retentive memory Configurable   e Default retentivity MBO to MB15   Clock flag bits 8  1 byte per flag bit    Data blocks Max  511   DB 1 to DB 511    e Length max  16 KB   Local data per priority class max  256 bytes   Blocks   Total 1024  DBs  FCs  FBs   The maximum number of blocks that can be  loaded may be reduced if you are using another  MMC    OBs see the Instruction List   e Length max  16 KB   Nesting depth   e Per priority class 8   e additional within an error OB 4   FBs Max  512   FB 0 to FB 511    e Length max  16 KB   FCs Max  512   FC 0 to FC 511    e Length max  16 KB       Address areas  I O        Total I O address area    max  1024 bytes 1024 bytes   can be freely addressed        I O process image    128 bytes 128 bytes                            Digital channels Max  256   e of those local Max  256   e Integrated channels 10 DI 6DO  Analog channels Max  64   e of those local Max  64   e Integrated channels None       CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05       Technical data of CPU 31xC       6 2 CPU 312C       Technical data          Assembly  Racks Max  1  Modules per rack Max  8       Number of DP masters       e Integrated None  e Via CP Max  1    Number of function modules and communication  processors you can operate                                                          e FM Max  8   e CP  PtP 
87. Default from CO to C7  e Counting range 0 to 999  IEC Counters Yes  e Type SFB  e Number unlimited  limited only by RAM size   S7 timers 256  e Retentive memory Configurable  e Default Not retentive  e Timer range 10 ms to 9990 s  IEC Timers Yes  e Type SFB  e Number unlimited  limited only by RAM size   Data areas and their retentivity  Flag bits 256 bytes  e Retentive memory Configurable  e Default retentivity MBO to MB15  Clock flag bits 8  1 byte per flag bit   Data blocks Max  511    DB 1 to DB 511   e Length max  16 KB  Local data per priority class max  510 bytes  Blocks  Total 1024  DBs  FCs  FBs     The maximum number of blocks that can be  loaded may be reduced if you are using another                                        MMC   OBs see the Instruction List  e Length max  16 KB  Nesting depth  e Per priority class 8  e additional within an error OB 4  FBs Max  512    FB 0 to FB 511   e Length max  16 KB  FCs Max  512    FC 0 to FC 511   e Length max  16 KB       CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05 6 9    Technical data of CPU 31xC       6 3 CPU 313C    6 10       Technical data  Address areas  I O        Total I O address area    max  1024 bytes 1024 bytes   can be freely addressed        I O process image    128 bytes 128 bytes                            Digital channels Max  1016   e of those local Max  992   e Integrated channels 24 DI  16 DO  Analog channels Max  253   e of those local Max  248   e Integrated channels 4
88. Differences of the CPUs 31xC  Element CPU CPU CPU CPU CPU CPU  312C 313C 313C 2 DP   313C 2 PtP   314C 2 DP 314C 2 PtP  9 pole DP     X   X    interface  X2   15 pole PtP       X   X  interface  X2   Digital inputs 10 24 16 16 24 24  Digital outputs  6 16 16 16 16 16  Analog inputs    4 1     4 1 4 1  Analog outputs       2     2 2  Technological  2 counters  3 counters   3 counters   3 counters 4 counters 4 counters  functions 1 channel for   1 channel  positioning for  positioning          CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data    Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05    2 3    Operating and display elements       2 1 Operating and display elements  CPU 31xC    2 1 1 Status and Error Indicators  CPU 31xC       LED designation Color   Meaning  SF red Hardware or software error    BF  for CPUs with DP   red Bus error  interface only                 DC5V green   5 V power for CPU and S7 300 bus is OK  FRCE yellow   Force job is active  RUN green   CPU in RUN    The LED flashes during STARTUP at a rate of 2 Hz  and in HOLD  state at 0 5 Hz     STOP yellow   CPU in STOP and HOLD or STARTUP    The LED flashes at 0 5 Hz when the CPU requests a memory reset   and during the reset at 2 Hz                    Reference  e CPU operating modes  STEP 7 Online Help     e Information on CPU memory reset  Operating instructions CPU 31xC and CPU31x   Commissioning  Commissioning Modules  CPU Memory Reset by means of Mode  Selector SwitchEvaluation of the LEDs upon error or diagnostic event  
89. ET IO provides you with a view of the system that is very similar to the view  obtained in PROFIBUS  You continue to configure and program the individual automation  devices     Further Information    For further information on PROFINET IO and PROFINET CBA  refer to the PROFINET  System Description  Differences between PROFIBUS DP and PROFINET IO and their  common features are described in the From PROFIBUS DP to PROFINET  O Programming  Manual     For detailed information on PROFINET CBA  refer to the SIMATIC IMAP and Component   Based Automation documentation     CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  3 18 Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05    Communication       3 2 10 1    3 2 Communication services    PROFINET IO System    Extended Functions of PROFINET IO  The following graphic shows the new functions of PROFINET IO    Company Network                         Industrial Ethernet          The connection of company  network and field level    lO  ET    Fe   2008      x   2 2 PG 2  z     2 Q     n 10    a lO  ET      CPU   Controller Device   200S  L_      31x2  aster CPU  31x2 Controller  TIE  PN DP DP  ial Master  IE PB Link  3          PB   ET 200 ET 200   DP SLAVE   DP SLAVE   PROFIBUS  The graphic displays You can see the connection path in the graphic    From PCs in your company network  you can access devices at the field level  Example     e PC     Switch 1     Router     Switch 2     CPU 31x 2 PN DP  1         The connection between the  automation system and f
90. Ethernet with  TCP IP protocol  by means  of loadable FBs        connection  is handled in the  user program by means of  loadable FBs                      3 6    CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05    Communication       See also    3 2 2    Properties    3 2 3    Properties    3 2 4    Properties    3 2 Communication services    Distribution and availability of S7 connection resources  Page 3 29   Connection resources for routing  Page 3 31     PG communication    PG communication is used to exchange data between engineering stations  PG  PC  for  example  and SIMATIC modules which are capable of communication  This service is  available for MPI  PROFIBUS and Industrial Ethernet subnets  Transition between subnets is  also supported     PG communication provides the functions needed to download   upload programs and  configuration data  to run tests and to evaluate diagnostic information  These functions are  integrated in the operating system of   SIMATIC S7 modules     A CPU can maintain several simultaneous online connections to one or multiple PGs     OP communication    OP communication is used to exchange data between operator stations  OP  TP  for  example  and SIMATIC modules which are capable of communication  This service is  available for MPI  PROFIBUS and Industrial Ethernet subnets     OP communication provides functions you require for monitoring and modifying  These  functions are integrated in the operating system of
91. Firmware 2 3 0 or higher   Properties  SNMP  Simple Network Management Protocol  is a standard protocol for TCP IP networks   Reference  For further information on the SNMP communication service and diagnostics with SNMP   refer to the PROFINET System Description   3 3 S7 connections  3 3 1 S7 connection as communication path    An S7 connection is established when S7 modules communicate with one another  This  S7 connection is the communication path        Note    Global data communication  PtP communication  communication with TCP IP and SNMP do  not require S7 connections        Every communication link requires S7 connection resources on the CPU for the entire  duration of this connection     Thus  every S7 CPU provides a specific number of S7 connection resources  These are  used by various communication services  PG OP communication  S7 communication or  S7 basic communication      CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  3 26 Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05    Communication       3 3 S7 connections    Connection points    Transition point    See also    An S7 connection between modules with communication capability is established between  connection points  The S7 connection always has two connection points  The active and  passive connection points     e The active connection point is assigned to the module that establishes the S7 connection   e The passive connection point is assigned to the module that accepts the S7 connection     Any module that is capable of
92. From MBO to MB15  Clock flag bits 8  1 byte per flag bit   Data blocks  e Number 2047   DB 1 to DB 2047   e Length 64 KB  e Non Retain support  configured retention  Yes  Local data per priority class max  1024 bytes  Blocks  Total 2048  DBs  FCs  FBs     The maximum number of blocks that can be  loaded may be reduced if you are using another                                     MMC   OBs See the Instruction List  e Length 64 KB  Nesting depth  e Per priority class 16  e additional within an error OB 4  FBs See the Instruction List  e Number 2048   FB 0 to FB 2047   e Length 64 KB       CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05 7 27    Technical data of CPU 31x       7 6 CPU 317 2 DP       Technical data          FCs See the Instruction List  e Number 2048    FC 0 to FC 2047   e Length 64 KB       Address areas  I O        Total I O address area    max  8192 bytes 8192 bytes   can be freely addressed                                                        Distributed max  8192 bytes  I O process image 256 256   Digital channels 65536 65536   of those local Max  1024  Analog channels 4096 4096   of those local 256 256  Assembly   Racks Max  4   Modules per rack 8   Number of DP masters   e Integrated 2   e via CP 2   Number of function modules and communication processors you can operate  e FM Max  8   e CP  PtP  Max  8   e CP  LAN  Max  10  Time of day       Real time clock    Yes  HW clock        e Buffered    Yes       e Buffered period    
93. INET IO update times on your PG     CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  5 14 Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05    Cycle and reaction times       5 3 Response time    DP cycle times in the PROFIBUS DP network    If you have configured your PROFIBUS DP master system in STEP 7  STEP 7 calculates the  typical DP cycle time to be expected  You can then view the DP cycle time of your  configuration on the PG     The figure below gives you an overview of the DP cycle time  In this example  let us assume  that the data of each DP slave has an average length of 4 bytes     Bus runtime    17 ms       1  1  1  i  1  1  1  1  1  1 1  1  1  1  1  1  1  1  1    7 ms 1    6 ms    Sms   1  4 ms       3 ms      2ms       n    i Transmission rate 12 MBit s       1 ms          Minimum    several O __  puer of DP alves  1 2 4 8 16 32 64 dependent on CPU       With multi master operation on a PROFIBUS DP network  you must make allowances for the  DP cycle time at each master  That is  you will have to calculate the times for each master  separately and then add up the results     CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05 5 15    Cycle and reaction times       5 3 Response time  5 3 2 Shortest response time    Conditions for the shortest response time    The figure below shows the conditions under which the shortest response time is reached     CCP  OS     A ee                A   0      User program      7       fe   a CCP  OS       a  v PIO       Calcul
94. International    The S7 CPU operating system provides up to 26 priority classes  or  Program execution  levels    Specific OBs are assigned to these classes  The priority classes determine which  OBs interrupt other OBs  Multiple OBs of the same priority class do not interrupt each other   In this case  they are executed sequentially     The process image is part of CPU system memory  At the start of cyclic program execution   the signal states at the input modules are written to the process image of the inputs  At the  end of cyclic program execution  the signal status of the process image of the outputs is  transferred to the output modules     CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05 Glossary 13    Glossary       Process interrupt    A process interrupt is triggered by interrupt triggering modules as a result of a specific event  in the process  The process interrupt is reported to the CPU  The assigned organization  block will be processed according to interrupt priority     Process Related Function  See PROFINET Component    Product version    The product version identifies differences between products which have the same order  number  The product version is incremented when forward compatible functions are  enhanced  after production related modifications  use of new parts components  and for bug  fixes     PROFIBUS  Process Field Bus   European fieldbus standard   See PROFIBUS DP  See PROFIBUS International    PROFIBUS Device  A PR
95. MC   incl  the ejector        4     Mode selector switch        5     Power supply connection        6     1  Interface X1  MPI DP         7           2  Interface X2  DP           CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05    Operating and display elements       2 2 Operating and display elements  CPU 31x    Slot for the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card  MMC     A SIMATIC Micro Memory Card  MMC  is used as memory module  You can use MMCs as  load memory and as portable storage medium        Note    These CPUs do not have an integrated load memory and thus require an MMC for  operation        Mode selector switch    Use the mode selector switch to set the CPU operating mode     Table 2 4 Positions of the mode selector switch                Position Meaning Description   RUN RUN mode The CPU executes the user program    STOP STOP mode The CPU does not execute a user program    MRES CPU memory reset Mode selector switch position with pushbutton function for CPU  memory reset  A CPU memory reset by means of mode  selector switch requires a specific sequence of operation              Reference  e CPU operating modes  STEP 7 Online Help     e Information on CPU memory reset  Operating instructions CPU 31xC and CPU31x   Commissioning  Commissioning Modules  CP Memory Reset by means of Mode Selector  Switch    e Evaluation of the LEDs upon error or diagnostic event  Operating Instructions CPU 31xC  and CPU 31x  Test Functions  Diagnostics and Troubleshoot
96. O    6 6 Technical data of the integrated I O    There are no parameters for standard digital outputs     Parameters of standard Al  The table below gives you an overview of the parameters for standard analog inputs     Reference                      Table 6 9 Parameters of standard Al   Parameters Value range Default Range of efficiency  Integration time  ms  2 5 16 6 20 20 Channel  Interference suppression 400 60 50 50 Channel   Hz    channel 0 to 3   Measurement range Disabled      10 V Channel   channel 0 to 3      20 mA    0    20 mA    4    20 mA        10 V    0   10V  Type of measurement Disabled  U voltage Channel   channel 0 to 3  V voltage      current  Unit of measurement Celsius Fahrenheit  Celsius Channel   channel 4  Kelvin  Measurement range Disabled  600 Q Channel   Pt 100 input  channel 4  Pt 100 600 Q  Type of measurement Disabled  Resistance Channel   Pt 100 input  channel 4  resistor           thermocouple             See also Chapter 4 3 in the Module Data Reference Manual     CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05    6 41       Technical data of CPU 31xC       6 6 Technical data of the integrated I O    Parameters of standard AO    The table below gives you an overview of standard analog output parameters  see also  Chapter 4 3 in the Module Data Reference Manual      Table 6 10 Parameters of standard AO          Parameters Value range Default Range of efficiency  Output range Disabled     10 V Channel   channel 0 
97. OFIBUS node has at least one or more PROFIBUS ports     A PROFIBUS device cannot take part directly in PROFINET communication but must be  included over a PROFIBUS master with a PROFINET port or an Industrial  Ethernet PROFIBUS link  IE PB Link  with proxy functionality     See Device    PROFIBUS DP    A PROFIBUS with the DP protocol that complies with EN 500170  DP stands for distributed  peripheral I O  fast  real time  cyclic data exchange   From the perspective of the user  program  the distributed I O is addressed in exactly the same way as the central I O     See PROFIBUS  See PROFIBUS International    PROFIBUS International    Technical committee that defines and further develops the PROFIBUS and PROFINET  standard     Also known as the PROFIBUS User Organization  PNO      CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Glossary 14 Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05    Glossary       PROFINET    Within the framework of Totally Integrated Automation  TIA   PROFINET represents a  consequent enhancement of     e PROFIBUS DP  the proven field bus  and  e Industrial Ethernet  the communication bus at cell level   Experience gained from both systems was and is being integrated into PROFINET     PROFINET is an Ethernet based automation standard of PROFIBUS International   previously PROFIBUS Users Organization e V    and defines a multi vendor communication   automation  and engineering model     See PROFIBUS International    PROFINET ASIC  See ASIC    PROFINET CBA    Within the f
98. OP STOP mode The CPU does not execute a user program    MRES CPU memory reset Mode selector switch position with pushbutton function for CPU  memory reset  A CPU memory reset by means of mode  selector switch requires a specific sequence of operation              Reference  e CPU operating modes  STEP 7 Online Help     e Information on CPU memory reset  Operating instructions CPU 31xC and CPU31x   Commissioning  Commissioning Modules  CP Memory Reset by means of Mode Selector  Switch    e Evaluation of the LEDs upon error or diagnostic event  Operating Instructions CPU 31xC  and CPU 31x  Test Functions  Diagnostics and Troubleshooting  Diagnostics with the  help of Status and Error LEDs    Power supply connection    Each CPU is equipped with a double pole power supply socket  The connector with screw  terminals is inserted into this socket when the CPU is delivered     CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  2 6 Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05       Operating and display elements       2 2 Operating and display elements  CPU 31x    2 2 2 Operating and display elements  CPU 317 2 DP    Operating and display elements                                                                p  SF                      lo  FRCE es MMC    RUN   m STOP    MRES                                                                      The figures show     1     the following CPU elements    Bus error indicator        2     Status and error displays        3     Slot for the Micro Memory Card  M
99. Operating  Instructions CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Test Functions  Diagnostics and Troubleshooting   Diagnostics with the help of Status and Error LEDs    CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  2 4 Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05       Operating and display elements  2 2 Operating and display elements  CPU 31x       2 2 Operating and display elements  CPU 31x    2 2 1 Operating and display elements  CPU 312  314  315 2 DP     Operating and display elements                                                                      The figures show the following CPU elements    1  Slot for the Micro Memory Card  MMC   incl  the ejector   2  2  Interface X2  only for CPU 315 2 DP     3  Power supply connection    4  1  Interface X1  MPI     5  Mode selector switch    6  Status and error displays             CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05 2 5    Operating and display elements       2 2 Operating and display elements  CPU 31x    Slot for the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card  MMC     A SIMATIC Micro Memory Card  MMC  is used as memory module  You can use MMCs as  load memory and as portable storage medium        Note    These CPUs do not have an integrated load memory and thus require an MMC for  operation        Mode selector switch    The mode selector switch is used to set the CPU operating mode     Table 2 3 Positions of the mode selector switch                Position Meaning Description   RUN RUN mode The CPU executes the user program    ST
100. PU 312C CPU 313C CPU 313C 2 CPU 314C 2  Module specific data CPU 312C CPU 313C CPU 313C 2 CPU 314C 2  Number of inputs 10 24 16 24  e Number of these inputs which can be used   8 12 12 16  for technological functions  Cable length  e Unshielded For standard DI  Max  600 m  For technological functions  No  e Shielded For standard DI  Max  1000 m  For technological function at max  counting frequency  100 m 100 m 100 m 50 m  Voltage  currents  potentials CPU 312C CPU 313C CPU 313C 2 CPU 314C 2  Rated load voltage L  24 VDC  e Polarity reversal protection Yes  Number of inputs which can be controlled  simultaneously  e Horizontal assembly      upto 104   F 10 24 16 24      up to 60   C 5 12 8 12  e Vertical assembly      up to 104   F 5 12 8 12  Electrical isolation  e Between channels and the backplane bus   Yes  e Between the channels No  Permitted potential difference  e Between different circuits 75 VDC   60 VAC  Insulation test voltage 500 VDC  Current consumption  e On load voltage L   no load    Max  70 mA Max  70 mA Max  70 mA  Status  interrupts  diagnostics CPU 312C CPU 313C CPU 313C 2 CPU 314C 2  Status display green LED per channel  Interrupts e Yes  if the corresponding channel is configured as interrupt input  e For using technological functions  please refer to the 7echnological  Functions Manual   Diagnostics functions e no diagnostics when operated as standard I O  e For using technological functions  please refer to the Technological  Functions Manual          
101. Page 3 19     CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05    Communication       3 7 Interfaces    3 1 4 Point to Point  PtP     Availability  CPUs with a    PtP    name suffix are equipped with a PtP X2 interface     Properties    Using the PtP interface of your CPU  you can connect external devices with serial interface   You can operate such a system at transmission rates up to 19 2 kbps in full duplex mode   RS 422   and up to 38 4 kbps in half duplex mode  RS 485      Transmission rate  e Half duplex  38 4 kbps  e Full duplex  19 2 kbps    Drivers  PtP communication drivers installed in those CPUs   e ASCII drivers  e 3964 R  Protocol  e RK 512  CPU 314C 2 PtP only     Devices capable of PtP communication  Devices equipped with a serial port  for example  barcode readers  printers  etc     Reference  CPU 31xC  Technological functions manual    CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05 3 5    Communication       3 2 Communication services    3 2    3 2 1    Communication services    Selecting the communication service    Overview of communication services    You need to decide on a communication service  based on functionality requirements  Your  choice of communication service will have no effect on     e the functionality available     e whether an S7 connection is required or not  and    e the time of connecting     The user interface can vary considerably  SFC  SFB        and is also determined by t
102. S7 basic communication No  e S7 communication No  e Constant bus cycle time Yes  e SYNC FREEZE Yes  e DPV1 Yes  Transmission speed Up to 12 Mbps  Number of DP slaves 124  DP slave  Services  e Routing Yes  only if interface is active   e Global data communication No  e S7 basic communication No  e S7 communication No  e Direct data exchange Yes       e Transmission rates    Up to 12 Mbps       e Automatic baud rate search    Yes  only if interface is passive        e Intermediate memory    244 bytes    244 bytes O       e Address areas    max  32 with max  32 bytes each                         e DPV1 No   2nd interface   Type of interface PROFINET  Physics Ethernet  electrically isolated Yes  Autosensing  10 100 Mbps  Yes             CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05    Technical data of CPU 31x       7 7 CPU 317 2 PN DP       Technical data    Functionality                                        e PROFINET Yes  e MPI No  e PROFIBUS DP No  e Point to point communication No  Services  e PG communication Yes  e OP communication Yes  e S7 communication Yes  with loadable FBs       Max  configurable interconnections 16  e Routing Yes  e PROFINET IO Yes  e PROFINET CBA Yes  PROFINET IO    Number of integrated PROFINET IO controllers 1  Number of connectable PROFINET IO devices 128   Max  user data consistency with PROFINET IO 256 bytes  Update Time 1 ms to 512 ms             The minimum value is determined by the set  communication porti
103. SIEMENS    SIMATIC    S7 300  CPU 31xC and CPU 31x   Technical data    Manual    This manual is part of the documentation package  with the order number  6  S7398 8FA10 8BAO    Edition 08 2004  AS5E00105475 05          Preface   Guide to the S7 300 1  documentation   Operating and display 2    elements       Communication        amp     Memory concept    Cycle and reaction times       Technical data of CPU 31xC       Technical data of CPU 31x       Appendix       Safety Guidelines     gt  ee    This manual contains notices which you should observe to ensure your own personal safety as well as to avoid  property damage  The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert  symbol  notices referring to property damage only have no safety alert symbol        Danger  indicates an imminently hazardous situation which  if not avoided  will result in death or serious injury           Warning  indicates a potentially hazardous situation which  if not avoided  could result in death or serious injury           Caution    used with the safety alert symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation which  if not avoided  may  result in minor or moderate injury           Caution    used without safety alert symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation which  if not avoided  may  result in property damage           Notice    used without the safety alert symbol indicates a potential situation which  if not avoided  may result in  an undesirab
104. Suppression of interference frequency f1          400   60   50 Hz       CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05    6 51    Technical data of CPU 31xC       6 6 Technical data of the integrated I O       Technical data                                                 Time constant of the input filter 0 38 ms   Basic processing time 1 ms   Interference suppression  error limits   Interference voltage suppression for f   nx  f1   1      f1   interference   frequency   n   1  2   e Common mode interference  Ucm  lt  1 0 V   gt  40 dB   e Feedback interference  peak value of the interference  lt  rated value of   gt 30dB  the input range    Crosstalk between the inputs  gt  60 dB   Operational error limits  across the temperature range  in relation to input   range    e Voltage current  lt 1    e Resistance  lt 5    Basic error limit  operational limit at 25   C  in relation to input range    e Voltage current  lt 0 7     e Resistance  lt 3    Temperature error  in relation to input range    0 006   K   Linearity error  referred to input range    0 06     Repeat accuracy  in transient state at 25   C  in relation to input range    0 06         Status  interrupts  diagnostics       Interrupts    e nointerrupts when operated as standard  I O       Diagnostics functions    e no diagnostics when operated as  standard 1 O    e For using technological functions  please    refer to the Technological Functions  Manual        Encoder selection data    
105. Technical Data       How do   insert and remove Micro Memory Cards      7 300  CPU 31xC and CPU 31x operating instructions   Installation  Commissioning     Commissioning modules      Removing   inserting a Micro Memory Card  MMC        Which CPU meets my demands on performance     S7 300 instruction list  CPU 31xC and CPU 31x       Length of the CPU response   execution times    CPU 31xC and CPU 31x Manual  Technical Data       Which technological functions are implemented     Technological Functions Manual          How can   use these technological functions        Technological Functions Manual       Table 1 7 Communication       Information on      Which principles do   have to take into account     is available in      Communication with SIMATIC Manual  PROFINET System Manual  System Description       Options and resources of the CPU    CPU 31xC and CPU 31x Manual  Technical Data       How to use communication processors  CPs  to optimize  communication    CP Manual       Which type of communication network is best suited to my  application      7 300  CPU 31xC and CPU 31x operating instructions   Installation  Configuring     Configuring subnets       How to network the various components     7 300  CPU 31xC and CPU 31x operating instructions   Installation  Configuring     Configuring subnets       What to take into account when configuring PROFINET  networks          SIMATIC NET Manual  Twisted Pair and Fiber Optic  Networks  6GK1970 1BA10 0AAO      Network Configurat
106. Typically 6 weeks  at an ambient temperature of  104   F        e Behavior of the clock on expiration of the  buffered period    The clock keeps running  continuing at the time   of day it had when power was switched off        e Accuracy    Deviation per day   lt  10 s                Operating hours counter 4  e Number 0to3  e Value range 2 31 hours   if SFC 101 is used   e Granularity 1 hour       e Retentive    yes  must be manually restarted after every  restart                Clock synchronization Yes  e Inthe PLC Master slave  e On MPI Master slave             7 28    CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05    Technical data of CPU 31x       7 6 CPU 317 2 DP       Technical data    S7 signaling functions       Number of stations that can be logged on for  signaling functions    32     depends on the number of connections  configured for PG   OP and S7 basic  communication                 Process diagnostics messages Yes  e Simultaneously enabled interrupt S blocks 60  Testing and commissioning functions   Status control variables Yes       e Variables    Inputs  outputs  memory bits  DBs  timers   counters                                                    e Number of variables 30      Of those as status variable Max  30      Of those as control variable Max  14  Forcing  e Variables Inputs Outputs  e Number of variables Max  10  Block status Yes  Single step Yes  Breakpoints 2  Diagnostic buffer Yes  e Number of entries  not config
107. U 31x  Technical data  Index 4 Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05    
108. aa ama            Measuring range of channel Al 3  OH  deactivated  Measurement type of channel AI3 2H  0    20 mA                                  Oy   deactivated 3H   4     20 MA  1H   V voltage 4H    20 mA    ee Wao  TON  2H  I current  i 9H      10V  3H   I current e na  9  Default setting  1H Prau SAMI H  Byte 7  7 0  Bit Nr       Ss       Measuring range of channel Al 3  OH  deactivated  Measurement type of channel Al4 2H  600 Ohm    OH  deactivated 6H  Pt100   6H  resistance Default setting  2H  15H  thermal resistance   Default setting  6H    Byte 8 bis 10  reserved    CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05 6 43    Technical data of CPU 31xC       6 6 Technical data of the integrated   O    Byte 11    Byte 12    Figure 6 8                                                                7 0   Bit  Nr   SS Aam  Output range of channel AO 0   setting see byte 12   Output range of channel AO 0   setting see byte 12   T O   Bit  Nr   See eee ee       Output range of channel AO 1    OF  deactivated  2    0   20mA   3u 4    20 MA  A    20 MA   Gs O 0V   Chee    10 V  Default setting  9        Output range of channel AO 1    OF  deactivated  T V voltage  Chie   current    Default setting  Qu    Structure of record 1 for standard AI AO  length of 13 bytes     Parameter for technological functions    The parameters for the respective function are found in the Manual 7echno logical Functions     6 44    CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data 
109. able of routing   CPUs or CPs    e The network configuration does not exceed project limits     e The modules have loaded the configuration data containing the latest  knowledge  of the  entire network configuration of the project     Reason  All modules participating in the network transition must receive the routing  information defining the paths to other subnets     e In your network configuration  the PG PC you want to use to establish a connection via  network node must be assigned to the network it is physically connected to     e The CPU must set to master mode  or    e when set to operate in slave mode  the Test  Commissioning  Routing functionality must  be enabled by setting the check box in STEP 7  in the  DP interface for DP slave properties dialog box     CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05 3 13    Communication       3 2 Communication services    Routing  Example of a TeleService application    The figure below shows the example of an application for remote maintenance of an  S7 station using a PG  The connection to other subnets is here established via modem  connection     The lower section of the figure shows how to configure this in STEP 7     e g  31xC 2DP e g  31xC 2DP    Real installation DP master DP slave                                                                                                                                                                                                                  
110. alog current voltage input of  CPU 313C 314C 2    CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05    Technical data of CPU 31xC       6 6 Technical data of the integrated I O    Measurement principle    31xC CPUs use the measurement principle of actual value encoding  Here  they operate  with a sampling rate of 1 kHz  That is  a new value is available at the peripheral input word  register once every millisecond  This value can then be read via user program  e g  L PEW    The  previous  value is read again if access times are shorter than 1 ms     Integrated hardware low pass filter    An integrated low pass filter attenuates analog input signals of channel 0 to 3  They are  attenuated according to the trend in the figure below     Attenuation     lt 1   Internal Attenuation  signal level  lt 10   strong  attenuation  100          63   MMMM  o E a    Inadmissible  input frequency       50 Hz 200 Hz 400 Hz Input frequency    Figure 6 3 Low pass characteristics of the integrated filter       Note  The maximum frequency of the input signal is 400 Hz        CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05 6 35    Technical data of CPU 31xC       6 6 Technical data of the integrated   O    Input filters  software filter     6 36    The current   voltage inputs have a software filter for the input signals which can be  programmed with STEP 7  It filters the configured interference frequency  50 60 Hz  and  multiples thereof
111. ated   O                                                                      31  30  29  28  27  26  25  24  23      16 15 ves 8 7  6  5 4 3  2 1 Bit no    aa eee area   e   reserved              PRAL from E124 0  PRAL from E124 7  PRAL from E125 0  PRAL from E125 7  PRAL from E126 0  PRAL from E126 7                                  PRAL  process interrupt  Inputs are designated with default addresses     Figure 6 9 Displaying the statuses of CPU 31xC interrupt inputs    PRAL  process interrupt    The inputs are assigned default addresses     6 6 5 Diagnostics    Standard I O    Diagnostic data is not available for integrated I O which is operated as standard I O  see also  the Reference Manual Module Data      Technological functions    Diagnostics options for the respective technological function are found in the Manual  Technological Functions     6 6 6 Digital inputs    Introduction  This section provides the specifications for the digital inputs of CPUs 31xC   The table includes the following CPUs   e under CPU 313C 2  the CPU 313C 2 DP and CPU 313C 2 PtP  e under CPU 314C 2  the CPU 314C 2 DP and CPU 314C 2 PtP    CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  6 46 Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05    Technical data of CPU 31xC       Technical data    6 6 Technical data of the integrated I O                                                                                                                         Table 6 12 Technical data of digital inputs  Technical data  C
112. ation    Immediately before reading in the PII  the status of  the monitored input changes  This change of the input  signal is still included in the PII     The change of the input signal is processed by  the application program     The response of the user program to the change  of the input signal is issued to the outputs     The  shortest  response time is the sum of     Table 5 10    Formula  Shortest response time    1 x process image transfer time for the inputs               I O delay    1 x process image transfer time for the outputs  1 x program processing time  1 x operating system processing time at the SCC    Shortest response time    The result is equivalent to the sum of the cycle time plus the I O delay times     See also  Overview  Page 5 14     5 16    CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05    Cycle and reaction times  5 3 Response time       5 3 3 Longest response time    Conditions for the longest response time  The figure below shows the conditions under which the longest response time is reached     Gas    CCP  OS     Naka eee    Delay of inputs      2xDP cycle time at PROFIBUS DP              While reading in the PII  the status of the monitored  PII input changes  This change of the input signal is not    o included in the PII any longer     User program       CCP  OS        The change of the input signal is included in the PII     Response time    The change of the input signal is processed by the    User program
113. ation    Within the framework of PROFINET  PROFINET CBA is an automation concept for the  implementation of applications with distributed intelligence   PROFINET CBA lets you create distributed automation solutions  based on default  components and partial solutions   Component Based Automation allows you to use complete technological modules as  standardized components in complex systems     The components are also created in an engineering tool which may differ from vendor to  vendor  Components of SIMATIC devices are created  for example  with STEP 7     CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05 3 17    Communication  3 2 Communication services       Extent of PROFINET CBA and PROFINET IO    PROFINET IO and CBA represent two different views of automation devices on Industrial  Ethernet     Component View  O Data View  PROFINET CBA PROFINET I O  SY                                                                                                                     Distributed Intelligence   Distributed I O      Plant wide Engineering   Normal I O View in STEP 7    Ta   PROFINET Component Description   aul  Generic Station Description     One Cable  IT Standards  Standard Applications    Protocols  Non   RT   Controller            Figure 3 1 Extent of PROFINET IO and Component Based Automation    Component Based Automation organizes the system structure based on the various  functions  These functions are configured and programmed     PROFIN
114. ax  8  e Length of GD packets max  22 bytes      Consistent data 22 bytes  S7 basic communication Yes       e User data per request      Consistent data    max  76 bytes  76 bytes  for X_SEND or X_RCV   64 bytes  for X_PUT or X_GET as the server        S7 communication    Yes       e As server    Yes       e asclient    Yes  via CP and loadable FBs        e User data per request      Consistent data    Max  180 bytes  with PUT GET   64 byte  as the server         5 compatible communication    Yes  via CP and loadable FCs                             Number of connections 16  can be used for  e PG communication Max  15      Reserved  default  4      Configurable 1 to 15  e OP communication Max  15      Reserved  default  4      Configurable 1 to 15  e  7 based communication Max  12      Reserved  default  12      Configurable 0 to 12  Routing Yes  max  4   Interfaces       1st interface       Type of interface    Integrated RS485 interface                Physics RS 485  electrically isolated No  Interface power supply max  200 mA     15 to 30 VDC           CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05       Technical data of CPU 31x                                                                                                                            CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data    7 4 CPU 315 2 DP   Technical data  Functionality  e MPI Yes  e PROFIBUS DP No  e Point to point communication No  MPI  Services  e PG OP communication Yes  
115. ble 5 13  Table 5 14  Table 6 1  Table 6 2  Table 6 3  Table 6 4  Table 6 5  Table 6 6  Table 6 7  Table 6 8  Table 6 9  Table 6 10  Table 6 11  Table 6 12  Table 6 13  Table 6 14  Table 6 15    Retentivity of the  RAM ech feet oes ides cd aaa eee alee idee eeie ened ean ee 4 2  Retentive behavior of memory objects  applies to all CPUs with DP MPI SS  31x 2 PN DP     4 3  Retentive behavior of DBs for CPUs with firmware  gt   V2 1 0 oe ceeeeceeneeeeeeeeteeeeeenteeeeeeaaes 4 4  Address areas Of system MEMOLY           ceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeseeeeeeseneeeeeeteeeaeeesenaeerseenaeees 4 5  Cyclic program PrOCESSING           ecceceeeseeeeeeeneeeeceeeeeeseeaeeeeseeeaeeeseeaaeeeseeaaeeeeeeaeeeseenaeeeseenaeeeeesaas 5 3  Formula for calculating the process image  PI  transfer time                   cccecceeseeceeeeeeeteeeesaeeeeaes 5 5  CPU 31xC  Data for calculating the process image  PI  transfer time          0 eceeeeeeeeeeeenees 5 5  CPU 31x  Data for calculating the process image  PI  transfer time   0 0 0 0    eeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeneaes 5 6  Extending the user program processing time             ceecceceeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaeeeeeeeaeeeeeenaeeeeeenaeeeeeeaaes 5 6  Operating system processing time at the scan cycle checkpoint                2  cece ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeetteeaees 5 7  Extended cycle time due to nested interrupts    eee cee eeeeeneeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaeeeeeeenaeeeeneaaes 5 7  Cycle time extension as a result Of C  rOrs       eee eeeeceeeeenee eect enneeeee
116. cal data  6 16 49     Download    of blocks  4 11      E  Error displays  2 11   G    Global data communication   3 9     I O process image  4 5   IE PB Link  Glossa    ry 17   Industrial Ethernet  3 16   3 16  Glossary 15    Integrated I O  watt cx   MPI  3 1 1   PtP interface  3 3  3 5    Which devices can   connect to which   interface   3 2    Interrupt inputs  6     Configuration  6 3    Interrupt response time  Calculation 5 22  Definition  5 21  of signal module  of the CPUs  5 21   Process interrupt Prgcesgino  523  5 27    Sample calculation   Interrupt  delay  5 23        Index 2    L    Load memor  Local data  4 8    Longest response time  Calculation 5 18  Conditions  5 17    M  Maximum cycle time  5 9   Memory    Compression  4 13     Memory areas    Load m rede  4 1     RAM  4 2  System memory  4 4 2     Memory function  Compression 4 16   CPU memory reset  4 13    Download of blocks  4 17   Promming    RAM to ROM  4 13   Restart  4 14     Uploading block 4 13    Warm start  4 14  MMC   Useful life 4 10  2a z6 2 8 2 10     Mode selector switch   MPI              N  Network node  3 11    O    OB 83  3 22  oB 627823    CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05    Index       P    Power supply   Connector 2 3  2 6 2 8  2 10  Process interrupt processing  5   PROFIBUS   PROFIBUS E iona  PROFINET          PROFINET CBA  3 17   PROFINET IO  3 17   PROFINET IO  3 18    PtP interface  3 3   3 5       R    RAM  4 2     RAM to ROM  4   R
117. cation                 Process diagnostics messages Yes   e Simultaneously enabled interrupt S blocks Max  20  Testing and commissioning functions   Status control variables Yes       e Variables    Inputs  outputs  memory bits  DBs  timers   counters          e Number of variables 30      Of those as status variable 30      Of those as control variable 14   Forcing Yes       e Variables    Inputs  outputs                         e Number of variables Max  10  Block status Yes  Single step Yes  Breakpoints 2  Diagnostic buffer Yes   e Number of entries  not configurable  Max  100             CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05    7 5    Technical data of CPU 31x       7 2 CPU 312    7 6       Technical data    Communication functions                      PG OP communication Yes   Global data communication Yes   e Number of GD circuits 4   e Number of GD packets Max  4      Sending stations Max  4      Receiving stations Max  4   e Length of GD packets max  22 bytes      Consistent data 22 bytes   S7 basic communication Yes       e User data per request      Consistent data    max  76 bytes  76 bytes  for X_SEND or X_RCV   64 bytes  for X_PUT or X_GET as the server        S7 communication                                     e As server Yes  e User data per request Max  180 bytes  with PUT GET       Consistent data 64 bytes   5 compatible communication Yes  via CP and loadable FCs   Number of connections Max  6  can be used for  e PG co
118. cccsceseseeseeeeeeecneeseeeeeneeees A    A 1 13 FMs CPs with separate MPI address in the central rack of a CPU 315 2 PN DP   CPU 317  A 9  A 1 14 Using loadable blocks for S7 communication for the integrated PROFINET interface    CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05 ix    Table of contents       Tables   Table 1 1  Table 1 1  Table 1 2  Table 1 3  Table 1 4  Table 1 5  Table 1 6  Table 1 7  Table 1 8  Table 1 9  Table 2 1  Table 2 2  Table 2 3  Table 2 4  Table 2 5  Table 2 6  Table 2 7  Table 3 1  Table 3 2  Table 3 3    Table 3 4  Table 3 5  Table 3 6    Table 3 7    Table 3 8   Table 3 9   Table 3 10  Table 3 11  Table 3 12  Table 3 13  Table 3 14    Application area covered by this manual                 cccccceeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeceeeaeeeeeeeeesececaneaeeeeeeeeeseenenaees  Ambient influence on the automation system  AS          cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaeeeseeaeeeeeeenaeeeeseaas 1 1   Galvanic ISQIAUON ens nse nelaseeeedaestaanad 1 1   Communication between sensors actuators and the PLC    eee eee ceee eee eaeeeeee tenes 1 2  The use of local and distributed 1 0 oc eceeeee cent eee eeeeeeeeseceeeeeeeneeeeeseneeeeeeseneeeeeseneaeeesennaees 1 2  Configuration consisting of the Central Unit  CU  and Expansion Modules  EMs                 6 1 2  CPU performance             cccceeeeeeeccne cece ee eeeecaeaeeeeeee seca aaaeceeeeeeesecaaaaeceeeeeeesecceeaeeeeeeeeeesesenniseeeeeseneeed 1 3  COMMUNICALION         e ee eeeeee ee eeee R ee
119. cess data of the current recipe  The figure below shows how to handle recipe  data     Loading memory                                      MMC   Working memory  Recipe 1 SFC 83 READ_ DBL       3 gt   GRY     Current  Recipe 2 recipe  E SFC 84 WRIT_DBL E NARRE  Recipe n          Saving a modified recipe     The data of new or modified recipe data records generated during program execution can  be written to load memory  To do this  call SFC 84  WRIT_DBL  in the user program   These data written to load memory are portable and also retentive on memory reset  You  can backup modified records  recipes  by uploading and saving these in a single block to  the PG PC        Note    Active system functions SFC82 to 84  active access to the MMC  have a distinct  influence on PG functions  for example  block status  variable status  download block   upload  open   This typically reduces performance  compared to passive system  functions  by the factor 10        CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05 4 15    Memory concept  4 2 Memory functions          Note    As a precaution against loss of data  always make sure that you do not exceed the  maximum number of delete write operations  Also refer to the SIMATIC Micro Memory  Card  MMC  section in the  Structure and Communication Connections of a CPU   chapter           AN Caution   Data on a SIMATIC Micro Memory Card can be corrupted if you remove the card while it  is being accessed by a write opera
120. chnological Functions        Pulse outputs    3 channels for pulse width modulation  max  2 5  kHz  see the Manual 7echnological Functions        Controlled positioning    No       Integrated  Controlling  SFB    PID controller  see the Manual Technological  Functions        Dimensions       Mounting dimensions W x H x D  mm     120 x 125 x 130                Weight 660 g  Voltages and currents  Power supply  rated value  24 VDC       e Permitted range    20 4 V to 28 8 V       Current consumption  no load operation     Typically 150 mA             Inrush current Typically 11 A  Power consumption  nominal value  700 mA  12t 0 7 A s       External fusing of power supply lines   recommended     LS switch Type C min  2 A   LS switch Type B min  4 A           Power loss          Typically 14 W       In Chapter Specifications of the integrated I O you can find    e the specifications of integrated I O under Digital inputs of CPUs 31xC  Digital outputs of  CPUs 31xC  Analog inputs of CPUs 31xC and Analog outputs of CPUs 31xC     e the block diagrams of the integrated I Os under Arrangement and usage of integrated    I Os     CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05    6 13    Technical data of CPU 31xC       6 4 CPU 313C 2 PtP and CPU 313C 2 DP    6 4 CPU 313C 2 PtP and CPU 313C 2 DP    Technical data    Table 6 5 Technical data for CPU 313C 2 PtP  CPU 313C 2 DP       Technical data       CPU and version    CPU 313C 2 PtP  CPU 313C 2 PtP CPU 313
121. ck on expiration of the The clock keeps running  continuing at the time   buffered period of day it had when power was switched off   e Accuracy Deviation per day   lt  10s  Operating hours counter 1  e Number 0  e Value range 2 31 hours   if SFC 101 is used   e Granularity 1 hour  e Retentive yes  must be manually restarted after every  restart  Clock synchronization Yes  e Inthe PLC Master  e OnMPI Master slave  S7 signaling functions  Number of stations that can log in for signaling 16  functions  e g  OS   depends on the number of connections  configured for PG   OP and S7 basic  communication   Process diagnostics messages Yes  e Simultaneously enabled interrupt S blocks 40  Testing and commissioning functions  Status control variables Yes  e Variables Inputs  outputs  memory bits  DBs  timers   counters  e Number of variables 30      Of those as status variable 30      Of those as control variable 14  Forcing  e Variables Inputs Outputs  e Number of variables Max  10  Block status Yes  Single step Yes  Breakpoints 2                CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05 7 15    Technical data of CPU 31x       7 4 CPU 315 2 DP       Technical data                            Diagnostic buffer Yes  e Number of entries  not configurable  Max  100  Communication functions  PG OP communication Yes  Global data communication Yes  e Number of GD circuits 8  e Number of GD packets Max  8      Sending stations Max  8      Receiving stations M
122. cription PROFINET  e inthe From PROFIBUS DP to PROFINET  O programming manual  This manual also  lists the new PROFINET blocks and system status lists   See also    PROFINET  PN   Page 3 3   3 2 10 2 Blocks in PROFINET IO    Chapter Content  This chapter explains the following   e Which blocks are intended for PROFINET  e Which blocks are intended for PROFIBUS DP  e Which blocks are intended for both PROFINET IO and PROFIBUS DP    Compatibility of the New Blocks    For PROFINET IO  it was necessary to create some new blocks  among other things   because larger configurations are now possible with PROFINET  You can also use these  new blocks with PROFIBUS     CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  3 20 Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05    Communication       3 2 Communication services    Comparison of the System and Standard Functions of PROFINET IO and PROFIBUS DP    For CPUs with an integrated PROFINET interface  the table below provides you with an  overview of     e System and standard functions for SIMATIC that you may need to replace when  converting from PROFIBUS DP to PROFINET IO     e New system and standard functions    Table 3 6 New System Standard Functions of PROFINET IO and PROFIBUS DP and Those That  Must Be Replaced                                  Blocks PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP  SFC13  read diagnostic data of   No Yes  a DP slave  Substitute   e event related  SFB 54  e state related  SFB 52  SFC58 59  write read data No  replacement  SFB53 52  yes  but s
123. cting as router for  subnets 1 and 2                                        7 300 S7 300  PG CPU  DP master  CPU  DP slave   z Subnet 2  e g  PROFIBUS DP                    Subnet 1  e g  MPI        The figure below shows the access to an Ethernet subnet  CPU 1  315 2 DP  for example  is  the router for subnet 1 and 2  CPU 2 is the router for subnet 2 and 3     CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05 3 11    Communication       3 2 Communication services    Routing network nodes  MPI     DP   Ethernet       CPU 1        e g  315 2 DP           MPI DP   master        CPU 2   317 2 PN DP            317 2 PN DP              MPI DP PN     active slave     CPU 3          PN          Subnet 2  PROFIBUS           Subnet 1  MPI                 PG    Number of routed connections    JS    Subnet 3  PROF Inet        The CPUs with DP interface provide a different number of connections for the routing    function     Table 3 5 Number of routing connections for DP CPUs                   CPU As of firmware version Number of connections for routing  31xC  CPU 31x 2 0 0 Max  4   317 2 DP 2 1 0 Max  8   31x 2 PN DP 2 2 0 Interface X1 configured as     e MPI  Max  10  e DP master Max  24  e DP slave  active   Max  14    Interface X2 configured as   e PROFINET Max  24             3 12    CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05    Communication  3 2 Communication services       Requirements  e The station modules are  cap
124. ction List       System function blocks  SFBs     See the Instruction List       User program security    Yes       Dimensions       Mounting dimensions W x H x D  mm     80 x 125 x 130             Weight 460g  Voltages and currents  Power supply  rated value  24 VDC       e Permitted range    20 4 V to 28 8 V       Current consumption  no load operation     Typically 100 mA                         Inrush current Typically 2 5 A  lt 1 A   s   External fusing of power supply lines min  2A   recommended    Power loss Typically 4 W       CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05    Technical data of CPU 31x       7 7 CPU 317 2 PN DP    Technical data    7 7 CPU 317 2 PN DP    Table 7 8 Technical data for the CPU 317 2 PN DP       Technical data  CPU and version       Order number    6ES7317 2EJ10 0ABO       e Hardware version    01       e Firmware version    V 2 3 0       e Associated programming package    STEP 7 as of V 5 3   SP 1                data blocks    Memory   RAM   e RAM 512 KB  e Expandable No  Capacity of the retentive memory for retentive 256 KB       Load memory    Plugged in with MMC  max  8 MB        Buffering    Guaranteed by MMC  maintenance free        Data storage life on the MMC   following final programming     At least 10 years       Execution times       Processing times of                                              e Bit operations 0 05 us   e Word instructions 0 2 us   e Fixed point arithmetic 0 2 us   e Floating
125. currence of an  interrupt signal and the call of the first interrupt OB instruction  Generally valid  Higher   priority interrupts take priority  This means that the interrupt response time is increased by  the program processing time of the higher priority interrupt OBs and the interrupt OBs of  equal priority which have not yet been executed  queued      Process diagnostic interrupt response times of the CPUs    Table 5 13  Process diagnostic interrupt response times                                           Process interrupt response times Diagnostic interrupt response  times  CPU external external Integrated I O   Min  Max   min  max  max   CPU 312 0 5 ms 0 8 ms   0 5 ms 1 0 ms  CPU 312C 0 5 ms 0 8 ms 0 6 ms 0 5 ms 1 0 ms  CPU 313C 0 4 ms 0 6 ms 0 5 ms 0 4 ms 1 0 ms  CPU 313C 2 0 4 ms 0 7 ms 0 5 ms 0 4 ms 1 0 ms  CPU 314 0 4 ms 0 7 ms   0 4 ms 1 0 ms  CPU 314C 2 0 4 ms 0 7 ms 0 5 ms 0 4 ms 1 0 ms  CPU 315 2 DP 0 4 ms 0 7 ms   0 4 ms 1 0 ms  CPU 315 2 PN DP  CPU 317 2 DP 0 2 ms 0 3 ms   0 2 ms 0 3 ms  CPU 317 2 PN DP                CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05 5 21    Cycle and reaction times       5 5 Interrupt response time    Calculation    The formula below show how you can calculate the minimum and maximum interrupt  response times     Table 5 14    Process diagnostic interrupt response times       Calculation of the minimum and maximum interrupt reaction time  Minimum interrupt reaction time of the CPU Maximum interrup
126. d by switches are located in the same network   a subnet  All the  devices in a subnet can communicate directly with each other     All devices in the same subnet have the same subnet mask     A subnet is physically restricted by a router     See Proxy    Substitute values are configurable values which output modules transfer to the process when  the CPU switches to STOP mode     In the event of an I O access error  a substitute value can be written to the accumulator  instead of the input value which could not be read  SFC 44      PROFIBUS is based on a bus topology  Communication nodes are connected by a passive  cable   the bus     In contrast  Industrial Ethernet is made up of point to point links  Each communication node  is connected directly to one other communication node     If a communication node needs to be connected to several other communication nodes  this  communication node is connected to the port of an active network component  a switch   Other communications nodes  including switches  can then be connected to the other ports  of the switch  The connection between a communication node and the switch remains a  point to point link     The task of a switch is therefore to regenerate and distribute received signals  The switch   learns  the Ethernet address es  of a connected PROFINET device or other switches and  forwards only the signals intended for the connected PROFINET device or connected switch     A switch has a certain number of ports  At each port  c
127. der to ensure a  defined process interrupt reaction time  the communication variables are copied in consistent  blocks with a maximum length of 64 bytes  CPU 317  160 bytes  to   from work memory at  the scan cycle checkpoint of the operating system  Data consistency is not guaranteed for  larger data areas        Note    Where defined data consistency is required  the length of communication variables in the  CPU s user program may not exceed 64 bytes  CPU 317  160 bytes         3 2 10 Communication via PROFINET  only CPU 31x 2 PN DP     What is PROFINET      Within the framework of Totally Integrated Automation  TIA   PROFINET represents a  consequent enhancement of     e PROFIBUS DP  the proven field bus  and  e Industrial Ethernet  the communication bus at cell level   Experience gained from both systems was and is being integrated into PROFINET     PROFINET is an Ethernet based automation standard of PROFIBUS International   previously PROFIBUS Users Organization e V    and defines a multi vendor communication   automation  and engineering model     CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  3 16 Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05    Communication  3 2 Communication services       Objectives in PROFINET    The objectives in PROFINET are     e An open Ethernet standard for automation based on Industrial Ethernet  Industrial Ethernet and standard Ethernet components can be used together  however   Industrial Ethernet devices are more reliable  and are therefore more suitab
128. e CPU 31x       LED designation Color   Meaning          SF red Hardware or software error   DC5V green   5 V power for the CPU and the S7 300 bus  FRCE yellow  LED is lit  Active force job    LED flashes at 2 Hz  Node flash test function  only CPUs with  firmware V2 2 0 or higher     RUN green   CPU in RUN    The LED flashes during STARTUP at a rate of 2 Hz  and in HOLD  state at 0 5 Hz     STOP yellow   CPU in STOP  or HOLD  or STARTUP    The LED flashes at 0 5 Hz when the CPU requests a memory reset   and during the reset at 2 Hz                          Displays for the X1 and X2 interfaces    Table 2 7 Bus error displays of CPU 31x                                        CPU LED designation Color   Meaning  315 2 DP BF red Bus error at DP interface  X2   317 2 DP BF1 red Bus error at interface 1  X1   BF2 red Bus error at interface 2  X1   31x 2 PN DP   BF1 red Bus error at interface 1  X1   BF2 red Bus error at interface 2  X1   LINK green   Active communication at interface 2  X2    RX TX yellow   Receive   Transmit data at interface 2  X2        Reference  e CPU operating modes  STEP 7 Online Help     e Information on CPU memory reset  Operating instructions CPU 31xC and CPU31x   Commissioning  Commissioning Modules  CP Memory Reset by means of Mode Selector  Switch    e Evaluation of the LEDs upon error or diagnostic event  Operating Instructions CPU 31xC  and CPU 31x  Test Functions  Diagnostics and Troubleshooting  Diagnostics with the  help of Status and Error LEDs
129. e Routing Yes  e Global data communication Yes  e S7 basic communication Yes  e S7 communication Yes       As server Yes       As client No  but via CP and loadable FBs   e Transmission rates 187 5 kbps  2nd interface  Type of interface Integrated RS485 interface  Physics RS 485  electrically isolated Yes  Type of interface Integrated RS485 interface  Interface power supply  15 to 30 VDC  max  200 mA  Functionality  MPI No  PROFIBUS DP Yes  Point to point communication No  DP master  Services  e PG OP communication Yes  e Routing Yes  e Global data communication No  e S7 basic communication No  e S7 communication No  e Constant bus cycle time Yes  e SYNC FREEZE Yes  e DPV1 Yes  Transmission speed Up to 12 Mbps  Number of DP slaves per station 124  Address area max  244 bytes   7 17    Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05    Technical data of CPU 31x       7 4 CPU 315 2 DP       Technical data    DP slave       Services       e PG OP communication    Yes       e Routing    Yes  only if interface is active                 e Global data communication No  e S7 basic communication No  e S7 communication No  e Direct data exchange Yes       e Transmission rates    Up to 12 Mbps       e Automatic baud rate search    Yes  only if interface is passive        e Intermediate memory    244 bytes     244 bytes O       e Address areas    max  32 with max  32 bytes each       e DPV1    No       GSD file    The latest GSD file is available at     http   www ad siemens de support    in the
130. e is assigned a worldwide unique device identifier in the factory  This  6 byte long device identifier is the MAC address     The MAC address is divided up as follows   e 3 bytes vendor identifier and  e 3 bytes device identifier  consecutive number      The MAC address is normally printed on the front of the device   Example  08 00 06 6B 80 CO    Master    When a master is in possession of the token  it can send data to other nodes and request  data from other nodes    active node      See Slave    Memory Card  MC     Memory Cards are memory media for CPUs and CPs  They are implemented in the form of  RAM or FEPROM  An MC differs from a Micro Memory Card only in its dimensions  MC is  approximately the size of a credit card      Micro Memory Card  MMC     Micro Memory Cards are memory media for CPUs and CPs  Their only difference to the  Memory Card is the smaller size     Module parameters    Module parameters are values which can be used to configure module behavior  A  distinction is made between static and dynamic module parameters     MPI  The multipoint interface  MPI  is the programming device interface of SIMATIC S7  It enables  multiple node operation  PGs  text based displays  OPs  on one or several PLCs  Each node  is identified by a unique address  MPI address     MPI address  See MPI   NCM PC  See SIMATIC NCM PC    CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05 Glossary 11    Glossary       Nesting depth    A block can be called fr
131. e parameters  etc    Blocks that are identified  as non runtime related are stored exclusively in load memory  You can also store all the  configuration data for your project on the MMC        Note    User programs can only be downloaded and thus the CPU can only be used if the MMC is  inserted in the CPU        CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05 4 1    Memory concept       4 1 Memory areas and retentivity    System memory  The RAM system memory is integrated in the CPU and cannot be expanded   It contains  e the address areas for address area memory bits  timers and counters  e the process image of the I Os  e local data    The RAM is integrated in the CPU and cannot be extended  It is used to run the code and  process user program data  Programs only run in RAM and system memory     Table 4 1 Retentivity of the RAM       All CPUs except CPU 317 CPU 317    RAM is always retentive  256 KB of RAM can be used for retentive data  modules  The remainder of the RAM can only be  used for code blocks and non retentive data blocks              4 1 2 Retentivity of the load memory  system memory and RAM    Your CPU is equipped with a service free retentive memory i e  its operation does not  require a buffer battery  Data is kept in retentive memory across POWER OFF and  restart  warm start      Retentive data in load memory    Your program in load memory is always retentive  It is stored on the MMC  where it is  protected against power failu
132. e specified a communication load of 50   The  calculated cycle time is 10 ms  Using the above formula  the cycle time is extended by the  factor 2     CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05 5 9    Cycle and reaction times       5 2 Cycle time    Physical cycle time depending on communication load    The figure below describes the non linear dependency of the physical cycle time on  communication load  In our sample we have chosen a cycle time of 10 ms     Cycle time    30 ms       The communication load can  be defined in this area        25 ms    20 ms       15 ms       10 ms             5 ms 1 T T T i  0  5  10  20   30   40   50   60      Communication load       Influence on the physical cycle time    Tips    5 10    From the statistical viewpoint  asynchronous events   such as interrupts   occur more  frequently within the OB1 cycle when the cycle time is extended as a result of  communication load  This further extends the OB1 cycle  This extension depends on the  number of events that occur per OB1 cycle and the time required to process these events        Note    Change the value of the  communication load  parameter to check the effects on the cycle  time at system runtime  You must consider the communication load when you set the  maximum cycle time  otherwise timing errors may occur        e Use the default setting wherever possible     e Increase this value only if the CPU is used primarily for communications and if the user 
133. eeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeseeeeseceieaeeeeeeeeeeeees  3 3 2 Assignment of S7 COMMECtIONS          ec eee ceeeceee tence ee teeeeeeeteneeeeeseaeaeeeeseaeeeeeseneeeeeseeeeeeeseneaeeetenneess  3 3 3 Distribution and availability of S7 connection resources  3 3 4 Connection resources fOr FOULING          ce cee eeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaeeeseeaeeeseenaeeeeeaas  3 4 DPV1       CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05 vii    Table of contents       viii              Memory CONCEP Ex i 2  ccceedensastvancsaceeecesadeandeestens cs nae AES eh ens EAA E ENEKEN EEEE i NENEA EE POKEREN ENEE   4 1 Memory areas and FOV ccs actos ctaidaitenanndenathaaecdacdadeudeitatisteinadiiaindnndanciedsdasrondamnbeaieatads 4 1  4 1 1 CPU Memon AlCAS kenrener  4 1 2 Retentivity of the load memory  system memory and RAM   4 1 3 Retentivity Of memory ODjOGCIS ters ciacet aces vineceesacaden R A ancdee neta vindiee aes 4 3  4 1 4 Address areas of system Memory 2 0 0 2     ccececeeeeecee cece ee eeeeceaeaeeeeeeeeeseaaeaeeeeeeeseeseceasaeeeeeeeeeeeesneaees 4 5   4 1 5 Properties of the Micro Memory Card  MMC         0  cccccscccccesssececessneeeeeeseeeeecsaeeeeesssaeesesenaeeeeneaas   4 2 Memory fUNCtIONS   00  eee cete eee eect ee ee tne ee ee tree eet ae ee errant deere ee eee nese ee ENNAN AEAEE   4 2 1 General  Memory TUNCHONS sesser aR EE  4 2 2 Loading user program from Micro Memory Card  MMC  to the CPU           ec eeeeeeeeetreeeees  4 2 3
134. eeeesaeeeeeseneeeeeseneeaeeeseneaeeeseeaeeeseenaees 7 8  Technical data for the CPU 315 2 DP o     ee eee eeeeeeeeeeenneeeeeeeaeeeeeeaaeeesecaaeeeseeiaeeeseenaeeeeneaas 7 13  Technical data for the CPU 315 2 PN DP   0      ec ccceeeeceeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeseeaeeeeeenaeeeeseaas 7 19  Technical data for the CPU 317 2 DP    eee eeenne erence ee AANA AA 7 26  Technical data for the CPU 317 2 PN DP aasian anaana ANa AAAA AAN 7 33    Consistent data    CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05    Guide to the S7 300 documentation    Overview    There you find a guide leading you through the S7 300 documentation     Selecting and configuring    Table 1 1    Ambient influence on the automation system  AS        Information on      What provisions do   have to make for AS installation  space     is available in       7 300  CPU 31xC and CPU 31x operating instructions   Installation  Configuring   Component dimensions     7 300  CPU 31xC and CPU 31x operating instructions   Installation  Mounting   Installing the mounting rail       How do environmental conditions influence the AS            7 300  CPU 31xC and CPU 31x operating instructions   Installation  Appendix          Table 1 2 Galvanic isolation       Information on      Which modules can   use if electrical isolation is required  between sensors actuators     is available in         7 300  CPU 31xC and CPU 31x operating instructions   Installation  Configuring     Electrical assembl
135. eeeeseas 6 39  Parameters of the interrupt inputs               c cecceececeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeseceaeaeceeeeeseseceaeaeeeeeeesetennineeeees 6 39  Parameters of standard  All czaaciveccavevvcscenesvaceecevedadaccuvdsualhuvisdatesveasaievv setae svesssdtev  eagadevvestageyeeesits 6 41   Parameters of standard AO         cccceeseecceeeeeneeeeeenneeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeeaaeeeeesaeeeseeaeeeeseeaeeeeeenaeeesseaes 6 42  Start information for OB40  relating to the interrupt inputs of the integrated I O    ee 6 45  Technical data of digital INpuls scenigis eed 6 47  Technical data of digital OUtPUtS sronda osan a dunner anise 6 49  Technical data of analog IN PUts seivscieccvtactecervessdeccdevetedevdee teneryessencdseetebevdeeteeaeeyeseeetee eter A 6 51   Technical data of analog Outputs          eee cece eee eeee eter eeee ee NE a a 6 53    CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05 xi    Table of contents       Table 7 1  Table 7 2  Table 7 3  Table 7 4  Table 7 5  Table 7 6  Table 7 7  Table 7 8  Table A 1    xii    Available  MMC S rssrieca a heetinn ses dvcatecd cvsetecuevent  coevins siedveetacneeeesaseneeaaaseane adsdevel sareeeesbesedeaeeae 7 2  Maximum number of loadable blocks on the MMC            eccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeeaas 7 2  Technical data for the CPU 312 000    ecceeee center eeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeceeeeeseeeeeeseneeaeeeeeeeeeeeseneaeeeeeenaees 7 3  Technical data for the CPU 314 000    ceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeene
136. enaeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaeeeeeeeiaeeeeeenaeeeeseaaes 5 8  Cycle time extension as a result of testing and commissioning functions                eee 5 11   Formula  Shortest response time                  ccccecccceceeeeeeeee cee cece ee eececeanaaeaeeeeeeeseseaeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaaees 5 16  Formula  Longest response time            cceeeccceeeeeneeeeeeneeeeeeeaeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeaeeeseeaeeeseenaeeeeeenaeeeeeeeaas 5 18  Calculating the response time sc  sccciieiiecdaseedecceieddeeceaeti r iranan ni eni decedueececeaeslalarie cea dauaedeetin aed 5 20  Process diagnostic interrupt response times                 c ceeeeceeeeeeeeeceneeeceeeeeeesececeaeeeeeeeeeseeensaees 5 21   Process diagnostic interrupt response times                cccceceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeseeeeeaeceeeeeeeeeesnsaees 5 22  Available  MMG   c2ecscccersctacaetessiacadesstaacenssvacad ives apdeveiuanddssvanacev  visagdtvestasadesvangceve vasadivesasdebeeteceuctad 6 2  Maximum number of loadable blocks on the MMC             cccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeaeeeseenaaeeeeeenaeeeeeeaaes 6 2  Technicalidata of CRU SV2C orien EAEE AA 6 3  Technicalidata   of CPU  ISTIC crassis anin E dpcbveit edie eeeeeent  Technical data for CPU 313C 2 PtP  CPU 313C 2 DP          cccccecsceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeseaeeeseeeeaes 6 14  Technical data of CPU 314C 2 PtP and CPU 314C 2 DP    ceeccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeseeesees 6 21   Parameters of standard Dl          eccccceeceeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaaeeeeseeaaeeeeeeaaeeeseeaeeeseena
137. ending data   e FB 64 TRCV   for receiving data   e FB 65  TCON   for connecting   e FB 66  TDISCON    for disconnecting    e UDT 65  TCON_PAR  contains the data structure for the configuration of your  connection     Data block for the configuration of the connection    TCP IP communication is connection oriented  Data can only be transferred when a  connection to the communication partner is established  The CPU supports multiple parallel  connections to a communication partner     To configure your connection  you need to create a DB that contains the data structure of  UDT 65  TCON_PAR   This data structure contains all parameters you need to establish the  connection  You need to create such a data structure for each connection  and you can also  organize it in a global DB  for example  ARRAY 1  8   T_ADDR_INFO       Connection parameter CONNECT of FB 65  TCON  reports the address of the  corresponding connection description to the user program  for example  P DBa DBXb c  byte 64      CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  3 24 Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05    Communication       Establishing a connection for communication    FB 65  TCON  establishes communication between the CPU and a communication partner   You can establish up to eight connections  The CPU automatically monitors and holds the    active connection     3 2 Communication services    Communication partner A must initiate the connection  When the connection of  communication partner A is active  i
138. ent teen tire tresses 7 19  7 6 6  a Cn ee  Serene rere ree terme en ene et E eet emer eter Serene ter Teter merece se 7 26  7 7 CPWSI2 PNDP o e e E E E E E 7 33  A ADPGMIOIX  an E EET  A 1 Information about upgrading to a CPU 31xC or CPU 31X    ssssssssssssssssssrsrsrsrnnrennrnrennnnnnnennennnns A 1   A 1 1 Area of applicability Meare mentee reer meer etner Teter se er ern enter reece ee rere ere Te A 1  A 1 2 Changed behavior of certain SF CS icnccinc wesw neler hence lala A 2   A 1 3 Interrupt events from distributed I Os while the CPU status is in STOP         ceccscseeseeeteeeees A 4  A 1 4 Runtimes that change while the program iS running             ceeeeeeeeeceenceeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeseaas    A 1 5 Converting the diagnostic addresses of DP slaves   0 0 00    eececeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeetaeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaas A   A 1 6 Reusing existing hardware configurations            eect eeeeeeeeeeee cette eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteneeeeeteeeaeeeeeeenaees A 6  A17  Replacing a CPU SKC  9 X nisnin ieaie aiaia eiei ia A 6  A 1 8 Using consistent data areas in the process image of a DP slave system        eneeeneeceeeeeenes AT  A 1 9 Load memory concept for the CPU 31XC 31X cin daccieadsntacdsernttciniesadansd cintadecinestacmaniverienstaqeads A 8   A110 POOP TNGGONS iini a S A E A 8  A 1 11 Routing for the CPU 31xC 31x as an intelligent slave               s snsssrsnstsnsnsssnsrsrsrsrsnntnsnsrnr rennene A 8  A 1 12 Changed retentive behavior for CPUs with firmware  gt   V2 1 0       c
139. equired basic i edge  a   Response time  Calculating the she teste        Conditions for eri shortest     Definition  5 14  14  DP cycle time rhe  Fluctuation width  5 14     Factors  5 14 14  Reduction with ioni  25 access 5 18         Sample calculation  5 25  Restart  4 14   Retentive memor 4 2  Load memory  4 2  Retentive behavior of memory objects  4 3     System memory  4 2  Routing    Access to stations on other T nets  3 10    Example of an appli ation  3 14   Network node  3 11   Requirements  3 13    CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05    S    S7 basic communica tion  3 7  S7 communication  3 8  a       of CPUs 31XxG      Time sequence aE llocation  3 28     Transition point   Sample calculation   of the cycle time 5 24    Sample calculation   of interrupt response time   of the response time  5 25   Scope of Er i v            shialar response time  Calculation 5 16  Conditions  5 16    Popa rtie  Slot  2 2     Simple Network Management Protocol  3 26  SNMP  3 26  SSL  3 23    W 16 0696  3 23  W 16 0A91  3 23           W 16 4C91 a   W 16 xy92  3 23  Status displays  2 11  2 11 11  System and Stand m E a E  3 21   System memory  4 2    1 0 HS re ima  ala5   Local data  4 8    Index 3    Index       T    Technical data  Analog inputs   Analog output    CPU 3120 ra ralar        U    Upload  4 4 12 4 13    Useful life of an MMC  4 10     User program  co    W    Warm start 14 14   Watchdog interrupt  5  5 23      CPU 31xC and CP
140. erver Yes     As client No  but via CP and loadable FBs   e Transmission rates Max  12 Mbps  DP master  Services  e PG OP communication Yes  e Routing Yes  e Global data communication No  e S7 basic communication No  e S7 communication No  e Constant bus cycle time Yes  e SYNC FREEZE Yes  e DPV1 Yes  Transmission speed Up to 12 Mbps  Number of DP slaves 124  DP slave  Services  e Routing Yes  only if interface is active   e Global data communication No  e S7 basic communication No  e S7 communication No  e Direct data exchange Yes       e Transmission rates    Up to 12 Mbps       e Automatic baud rate search    Yes  only if interface is passive        e Intermediate memory    244 bytes    244 bytes O       e Address areas    max  32 with max  32 bytes each                         e DPV1 No   2nd interface   Type of interface PROFINET  Physics Ethernet  electrically isolated Yes  Autosensing  10 100 Mbps  Yes             CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05    Technical data of CPU 31x       7 5 CPU 315 2 PN DP       Technical data    Functionality                                        e PROFINET Yes  e MPI No  e PROFIBUS DP No  e Point to point communication No  Services  e PG communication Yes  e OP communication Yes  e S7 communication Yes  with loadable FBs       Max  configurable interconnections 14  e Routing Yes  e PROFINET IO Yes  e PROFINET CBA Yes  PROFINET IO       Number of integrated PROFINET IO controllers 1  Number of co
141. f CPU 314C 2  approx  0 7 ms  e Extension by communication according to the formula   200 us   1000 us x 20     400 us   0 4 ms  e Process interrupt response time of SM 321  DI 16 x 24 VDC       Internal interrupt preparation time  0 25 ms      Input delay  0 5 ms    e Neither PROFIBUS DP  nor PROFINET IO are being used  so you do not have to make  allowances for any DP cycle times on PROFIBUS DP or for PROFINET IO update times     The process interrupt response time is equivalent to the sum of the listed time factors   Process interrupt response time   0 7 ms   0 4 ms   0 25 ms   0 5 ms   approx  1 85 ms     This calculated process interrupt response time expires between the time a signal is  received at the digital input and the call of the first instruction in OB40     CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05 5 27    Cycle and reaction times       5 6 Sample calculations    CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  5 28 Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05    Technical data of CPU 31xC    6 1 General technical data    6 1 1 Dimensions of CPU 31xC  Each CPU features the same height and depth  only the width dimensions differ   e Height  125 mm  e Depth  115 mm  or 180 mm with opened front cover                             Width of CPU   CPU Width  CPU 312C 80 mm  CPU 313C 120 mm  CPU 313C 2 PtP 120 mm  CPU 313C 2 DP 120 mm  CPU 314C 2 PtP 120 mm  CPU 314C 2 DP 120 mm          CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  
142. fault 8  1  315 2 DP 16 1 to 15  default   1 to 15  default 1 0 to 12  default 12  315 2 PN DP 1  317 2 DP 32 1 to 31  default   1 to 31  default 1 0 to 30  default 0  317 2 PN DP 1  Note    3 30    When using a CPU 315 2 PN DP  you can configure up to 14 connection resources for  S7 communication in NetPro  These connections are then reserved  When using a  CPU 317 2 PN DP  you can configure up to 16 connection resources for S7 communication       in NetPro        CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05    Communication       3 3 S7 connections    3 3 4 Connection resources for routing    Number of connection resources for routing    The CPUs with DP interface provide a different number of connection resources for the  routing function     Table 3 12   Number of routing connection resources  for DP PN CPUs              CPU As of firmware version Number of connections for routing  31xC  CPU 31x 2 0 0 Max  4   317 2 DP 2 1 0 Max  8   31x 2 PN DP 2 2 0 Interface X1 configured as     e MPI  Max  10  e DP master Max  24  e DP slave  active   Max  14    Interface X2 configured as   e PROFINET  Max  24                   Example of a CPU 314C 2 DP  The CPU 314C 2 DP provides 12 connection resources   e Reserve two connection resources for PG communication   e Reserve three connection resources for OP communication   e Reserve one connection resource for S7 based communication     This leaves six connection resources available for other communica
143. fe on the MMC At least 10 years    following final programming    Buffering Guaranteed by MMC  maintenance free   Execution times   Processing times of   e Bit operations Min  0 2 us   e Word instructions Min  0 4 us   e Fixed point arithmetic Min  5 us   e Floating point arithmetic Min  6 us   Timers counters and their retentivity   S7 counters 128   e Retentive memory Configurable   e Default from CO to C7   e Counting range 0 to 999   IEC Counters Yes   e Type SFB   e Number unlimited  limited only by RAM size   S7 timers 128   e Retentive memory Configurable   e Default Not retentive   e Timer range 10 ms to 9990 s   IEC Timers Yes   e Type SFB   e Number unlimited  limited only by RAM size                 CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05 7 3    Technical data of CPU 31x       7 2 CPU 312       Technical data    Data areas and their retentivity                                                          Flag bits 128 bytes   e Retentive memory Yes   e Default retentivity MBO to MB15   Clock flag bits 8  1 byte per flag bit    Data blocks 511   DB 1 to DB 511    e Length 16 KB   Local data per priority class max  256 bytes   Blocks   Total 1024  DBs  FCs  FBs   The maximum number of blocks that can be  loaded may be reduced if you are using another  MMC    OBs See the Instruction List   e Length max  16 KB   Nesting depth   e Per priority class 8   e additional within an error OB 4   FBs Max  512   FB 0 to FB 511    e Length max  1
144. gement    One CPU broadcasts its data to all other DP CPUs on the MPI subnet  This function is  integrated in the CPU operating system     Reduction ratio    The reduction ratio specifies the cyclic intervals for GD communication  You can set the  reduction ratio when you configure global data communication in STEP 7  For example  if  you set a reduction ratio of 7  global data are transferred only with every 7th cycle  This  reduces CPU load     Send and receive conditions  Conditions which should be satisfied for GD communication     e For the transmitter of a GD packet   Reduction ratiOtransmitter X cycle timetransmitter  gt  60 ms    e For the receiver of a GD packet   Reduction ratiOreceiver X cycle timereceiver   lt  reduction ratiOtransmitter X cycle tiMetransmitter    A GD packet may be lost if you do not adhere to these conditions  The reasons being   e the performance of the  smallest  CPU in the GD circuit  e asynchronous transmitting   receiving of global data at the stations    When setting in STEP 7     Transmit after each CPU cycle     and the CPU has a short scan  cycle time   lt  60 ms   the operating system might overwrite a GD packet of the CPU before it  is transmitted  The loss of global data is indicated in the status box of a GD circuit  if you set  this function in your STEP 7 configuration     CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05 3 9    Communication       3 2 Communication services    GD resources of the CPUs 
145. h PROFINET IO and PROFIBUS DP    Compatibility of the new SSLs    For PROFINET IO  it was necessary to create some new SSLs  among other things   because larger configurations are now possible with PROFINET     You can also use these new SSLs with PROFIBUS     You can continue to use a known PROFIBUS SSL that is also supported by PROFINET  If  you use an SSL in PROFINET that does not support PROFINET  an error code is returned in  RET_VAL  8083  Index wrong or not permitted      Comparison of the System Status Lists of PROFINET and PROFIBUS                               Table 3 9 Comparison of the System Status Lists of PROFINET and PROFIBUS   SSL ID PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP   Applicability   W 16 0591 yes Yes Module status information for the interfaces of a   parameter adr1 changed  module submodule   W 16 0A91 yes Yes Status information of all subsystems and master   parameter adr1 changed  systems  S7 300 without CPU 318 2 DP    W 16 0C91 yes Yes Module status information of a module submodule in a   parameter adr1 adr2 and central configuration or attached to an integrated DP or  expected actual type ID PN interface module using the logical address of the  changed  module    W 16 4C91 yes Yes Not with S7 300   parameter adr1 changed  Module status information of a module submodule   attached to an external DP or PN interface module  using the start address   W 16 0D91 yes Yes Module status information of all modules in the   parameter adr1 changed  specified rack station 
146. he  hardware used  SIMATIC CPU  PC           Overview of communication services    The table below provides an overview of communication services offered by the CPUs                                Table 3 2 Communication services of the CPUs  Communication service   Functionality Time at which the S7 via MPI   via DP   via via  connection is established     PtP PN   PG communication Commissioning  test  From the PG  starting when X X   X  diagnostics the service is being used   OP communication Monitor and modify via OP at POWER ON X X   X   S7 basic communication   Data exchange is programmed at the blocks X          SFC parameters    S7 communication Data exchange in server via active partner at POWER   Onlyin   Only in    X  and client mode  ON  server   server  Configuration of mode   mode  communication required    Global data Cyclic data exchange  for   does not require an S7 X         communication example  flag bits  connection   Routing PG functions for example testing  from the PG  starting when the   X X   X    only for CPUs with diagnostics on other service is being used   DP or PN interface  networks also   PtP communication Data exchange via serial does not require an S7     X    interface connection   SNMP Standard protocol for does not require an S7       X    Simple Network network diagnostics and connection   Management Protocol    Configuration   open communication by   Data exchange via Does not require an S7       x    means of TCP IP          Industrial 
147. he central rack of an S7 300  then the CPU  forms its own communication bus via the    backplane bus with these FM CPs  which are  separated from the other subnets     The MPI address of such an FM CP is no longer  relevant for the stations on other subnets  The  communication to the FM CP is made via the MPI  address of the CPU     When exchanging your existing CPU with a CPU 315 2 PN DP   CPU 317  you therefore  need to     e replace the CPU in your STEP 7 project with the CPU 315 2 PN DP   CPU 317     e Reconfigure the OPs  The control and the destination address must be reassigned    the  MPI address of the CPU 315 2 PN DP   CPU 317 and the slot of the respective FM     e Reconfigure the project data for FM CP to be loaded to the CPU   This is required for the FM CP in this rack to remain  available  to the OP PG                 CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05    Appendix  A 7 Information about upgrading to a CPU 31xC or CPU 31x       A 1 14 Using loadable blocks for S7 communication for the integrated PROFINET  interface    If you have already used S7 communication via CP with loadable FBs  FB 8  FB 9  FB 12    FB 15 and FC 62 with version V1 0  from the SIMATIC_NET_CP STEP 7 library  these  blocks all feature the family type CP300 PBK  and now want to use the integrated  PROFINET interface for S7 communication  you must use the corresponding blocks from the  Standard Library Communication Blocks STEP 7 library in your progra
148. his can  significantly increase cycle time     Cycle extension through component based automation  CBA     By default  the operating system of your CPU updates the PROFINET interface as well as  the DP interconnections at the cycle control point  However  if you deactivated these  automatic updates during configuration  e g  to obtain improved capabilities of influencing the  time behavior of the CPU   you must perform the update manually  This is done by calling  SFCs 112 to 114 at the appropriate times     Information about SFC 112 to 114 is available in the STEP 7 Online Help     Extending the OB1 cycle time    The OB1 cycle is extended by   e Increasing the number of PROFINET interconnections   e Increasing the number of remote partners    e Increasing the data volume and    e Incrasing the transfer frequency    CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05 5 11    Cycle and reaction times       5 2 Cycle time    5 12       Note    The use of CBA with cyclical PROFINET interconnections requires the use of switches to  maintain the performance data  100 Mbit full duplex operation is mandatory with cyclical  PROFINET interconnections        The following graphic shows the configuration that was used for the measurements                  HMI OPC    Industrial Ethernet       Number of observed  interconnections   in SIMATIC iMAP PROFINET PROFINET   or OPC  200 remote        remote Quantity  32  node 1 node 32    PROFINET device with  proxy func
149. hnical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05 Glossary 9    Glossary       IO device    IO supervisor    IO system    IP address    LAN    Load memory    See PROFINET IO Controller  See PROFINET IO Device  See PROFINET  O Supervisor  See PROFINET IO System    See PROFINET IO Controller  See PROFINET IO Device  See PROFINET  O Supervisor  See PROFINET IO System    See PROFINET IO System    To allow a PROFINET device to be addressed as a node on Industrial Ethernet  this device  also requires an IP address that is unique within the network  The IP address is made up of  4 decimal numbers with a range of values from 0 through 255  The decimal numbers are  separated by a period     The IP address is made up of  e The address of the  subnet  network and    e The address of the node  generally called the host or network node      Local area network to which several computers are connected within an enterprise  The LAN  therefore has a limited geographical span and is solely available to a company or institution     Load memory is part of the CPU  It contains objects generated by the programming device  It  is implemented either as a plug in Memory Card or permanently integrated memory     Load power supply    Local data    Glossary 10    Power supply to the signal   function modules and the process I O connected to them     See Data  temporary    CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05    Glossary       MAC address    Each PROFINET devic
150. hould already have  record in I O  been replaced by SFB53 52 in  DPV1   SFB52 53  read write data Yes Yes  record   SFB54  evaluate alarm  Yes Yes  SFC102  read predefined No  replacement  SFB81  Yes  parameters   new  Yes Yes  SFB81  read predefined  parameters   SFC5  query start address ofa   No  replacement  SFC70  Yes  module   new  Yes Yes  SFC70  query start address of a  module   SFC49  query the slot belonging   No  replacement  SFC71  Yes  to a logical address   new  Yes Yes  SFC71  query the slot belonging  to a logical address                    CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05 3 21    Communication       3 2 Communication services    The following table provides you with an overview of the system and standard functions for  SIMATIC  whose functionality must be implemented by other functions when converting from  PROFIBUS DP to PROFINET IO     Table 3 7 System and Standard Functions in PROFIBUS DP that must be Implemented with  Different Functions in PROFINET IO                         Blocks PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP  SFC55  write dynamic No Yes  parameters   implement with SFB53   SFC56  write predefined No Yes  parameters   implement with SFB81 and   SFB53   SFC57  assign parameters to No Yes  module   implement with SFB81 and   SFB53        You cannot use the following SIMATIC system and standard functions with PROFINET IO   e SFC7  trigger hardware interrupt on DP master    e SFC11  synchronize groups of DP slaves   
151. iables    Inputs  outputs  memory bits  DBs  timers   counters                                                    e Number of variables Max  30      of those as status variable Max  30      of those as control variable Max  14  Forcing Yes  e Variables Inputs  outputs  e Number of variables Max  10  Block status Yes  Single step Yes  Breakpoints 2  Diagnostic buffer Yes  e Number of entries  not configurable  Max  100  Communication functions  PG OP communication Yes  Global data communication Yes  e Number of GD circuits 4  e Number of GD packets Max  4      Sending stations Max  4      Receiving stations Max  4  e Length of GD packets max  22 bytes      Consistent data 22 bytes  S7 basic communication Yes       e User data per request      Consistent data    max  76 bytes  76 bytes  for X_SEND or X_RCV   64 bytes  for X_PUT or X_GET as the server        S7 communication       e As server    Yes       e as client    Yes  via CP and loadable FBs        e User data per request    max  180 bytes  with PUT GET                  Consistent data 64 bytes   5 compatible communication Yes  via CP and loadable FCs   Number of connections Max  8             CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05    Technical data of CPU 31xC       6 3 CPU 313C       Technical data    can be used for                      e PG communication Max  7       Reserved  default  1       Configurable from 1 to 7  e OP communication Max  7       Reserved  default  1       Co
152. iate  hardware  For example  you can use all digital inputs not used for counting functions as  standard DI     Read access to inputs used by technological functions is possible  Write access to outputs  used by technological functions is not possible     See also    CPU 312C  Page 6 3    CPU 313C  Page 6 8      CPU 313C 2 PtP and CPU 313C 2 DP  Page 6 14   CPU 314C 2 PtP and CPU 314C 2 DP  Page 6 21     CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05 6 33    Technical data of CPU 31xC       6 6 Technical data of the integrated   O    6 6 2    Analog I O    Wiring of the current voltage inputs    6 34    The figure below shows the wiring diagram of the current voltage inputs operated with  2  4 wire measuring transducers                             e ns Alp  Pin 2 to 4        2 wire Al   Pin 5 to 7  signal converter  i Bi 7 oa Al  Pin 8 to 10     Al2        Al   Pin 11 to 13  Al2  F  20     Mana E M                We recommend connecting Alxc with Mana using a bridge     Figure 6 1 Connection of a 2 wire measuring transducer to an analog current voltage input of  CPU 313C 314C 2             L  M Alg   Pin 2 to 4    Al    Pin 5 to 7    kE iis Al    Pin 8 to 10    signal converter             Al   Pin 11 to 13          Short circuit non wired input channels  and connect Alx with Mana                    We recommend connecting Alx with Mana  when using the 4 wire signal converter        Figure 6 2 Connection of a 4 wire measuring transducer to an an
153. ical data of the integrated I O    Block diagram of integrated digital I O of CPUs 313C 313C 2 314C 2                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                               1 21  1L  2L   2 22  Jeo  RE 3   5 23 l  4 1 i m 24    F PHHH    1  gt  25 ry  6   26       gt  1   9  EA i i at    27 o  pos gS  i   i i 28 o  9 i i 29         O i      ot    te     3  HA     5    11    1 31  o     gt  oO 3L   l 12 T 1   32  J 13 7 E   33 l  pe a i i 34 ry  15     l i 35      _U   i o    l 16   36 l  po N   X     E 18       38 l  19 T  39 l  6 20    40          1M 3M          CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05 6 31    Technical data of CPU 31xC       6 6 Technical data of the integrated   O    CPU 313C 314C 2  Pin out of the integrated Al AO and DI  connector X11                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  
154. ication   e Interrupts are not processed     Hence  the physical cycle time is 6 ms     CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  5 24 Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05    Cycle and reaction times       5 6 Sample calculations    Calculating the longest response time  Longest response time   6 8 ms x 2   13 6 ms     I O delay can be neglected     Neither PROFIBUS DP  nor PROFINET IO are being used  so you do not have to make  allowances for any DP cycle times on PROFIBUS DP or for PROFINET IO update times     Interrupts are not processed     5 6 2 Sample of response time calculation    Installation    You have configured an S7 300 and equipped it with the following modules in two racks     User program    a CPU 314C 2   Configuring the cycle load as a result of communication  40     4 digital input modules SM 321  DI 32 x 24 VDC  4 bytes each in the PI    3 digital output modules SM 322  DO 16 x 24 VDC 0 5 A  2 bytes each in the Pl   2 analog input modules SM 331  Al 8 x 12 bit  not in the Pl    2 analog output modules SM 332  AO 4 x 12 bit  not in the Pl     According to the instruction list  the user program runtime is 10 0 ms     Calculating the cycle time  In this example  the cycle time is equivalent to the sum of the following times     User program execution time    approx  10 ms x CPU specific factor 1 10   approx  11 ms   Process image transfer time   Process image of inputs  100 us   16 bytes x 37 us   approx  0 7 ms  Process image of outputs  100 us   6 bytes x 3
155. ield  level    You can  of course  also access other areas in Industrial Ethernet from a PG at the field  level     Example   e PG     Switch 3     Switch 2     to an IO device of the ET 200S  2         The IO controller of the CPU  31x 2 PN DP  1  controls  devices on Industrial Ethernet  and on PROFIBUS directly    At this point  you see the extended IO feature between the IO controller and IO device s   on Industrial Ethernet     e The CPU 31x 2 PN DP  1  is the IO controller for one of the ET 200S  2  IO devices     e The CPU 31x 2 PN DP  1  is also the IO controller for the ET 200  DP slave   5  via  the IE PB Link  6         A CPU can be both IO  controller and DP master       e The CPU 31x 2 PN DP  3  is the IO controller for the other ET 200S  2  IO device     e The CPU 31x 2 PN DP  3  is the DP master for a DP slave  4   The DP slave  4  is       Here  you can see that a CPU can be both IO controller for an IO device as well as  DP master for a DP slave     CPU 31x 2 PN DP  3      Switch 3     Switch 2     ET 2008S  2        assigned locally to the CPU  3  and is not visible on Industrial Ethernet        CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data    Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05    3 19    Communication       3 2 Communication services    Requirements  e CPUs as of Firmware 2 3 0  for example CPU 315 2 PN DP   e STEP 7  as of Version 5 3   Service Pack 1    Reference  You will find information on the topic of PROFINET in the following sources   e inthe System Des
156. ies satisfies the requirements and safety specifications of  the following  EC Directives     e EC Directive 73 23 EEC  Low voltage directive   e EC Directive 89 336 EEC  EMC directive     C tick mark  The SIMATIC S7 300 product series is compliant with AS NZS 2064  Australia      Standards  The SIMATIC S7 300 product series is compliant with IEC 61131 2     CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  iv Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05    Preface       Documentation classification    This manual is part of the S7 300 documentation package        Name of the manual    YOU ARE READING the Manual  e CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data    Description    Control and display elements  communication   memory concept  cycle and response times   technical data       Reference Manual  e CPU data  CPU 312 IFM     318 2 DP    Control and display elements  communication   memory concept  cycle and response times   technical data       Operating Instructions  e    7 300  CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Installation    Configuration  installation  wiring  addressing   commissioning  maintenance and the test  functions  diagnostics and troubleshooting        Installation Manual    e  7 300 Automation System  Installation  CPU  312 IFM      318 2 DP    Configuration  installation  wiring  addressing   commissioning  maintenance and the test  functions  diagnostics and troubleshooting        System Manual  PROFINET System Description    Basic information on PROFINET     Network components  data excha
157. if you remove the card while it  is being accessed by a write operation  In this case  you may have to delete the MMC on  your PG  or format the card in the CPU  Never remove an MMC in RUN mode  Always  remove it when power is off  or when the CPU is in STOP state  and when the PG is not  a writing to the card  When the CPU is in STOP mode and you cannot not determine  whether or not a PG is writing to the card  e g  load delete block   disconnect the  communication lines        CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  4 18 Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05    Memory concept       4 2 Memory functions    4 2 7 Backup of project data to a Micro Memory Card  MMC     Function principle    Using the Save project to Memory Card and Fetch project from Memory Card functions  you  can save all project data to a SIMATIC Micro Memory Card  and retrieve these at a later  time  For this operation  the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card can be located in a CPU or in the  MMC adapter of a PG or PC     Project data are compressed before they are saved to a SIMATIC Micro Memory Card  and  uncompressed when fetched        Note    In addition to project data  you may also have to store your user data on the MMC  You  should therefore first verify MMC memory space     A message warns you if the memory capacity on your MMC is insufficient        The volume of project data to be saved corresponds with the size of the project s archive file        Note    For technical reasons  you can only transfer the
158. ime    Within the context of PROFINET   device  is the generic term for    e Automation systems    e Field devices  for example  PLC  PC     e Active network components  for example  distributed I O  valve blocks  drives    e hydraulic devices and   e pneumatic devices     The main characteristic of a device is its integration in PROFINET communication over  Ethernet or PROFIBUS     The following device types are distinguished based on their attachment to the bus   e PROFINET devices   e PROFIBUS devices   See PROFIBUS Device   See PROFINET Device    Before an IO device can be addressed by an IO controller  it must have a device name  In  PROFINET  this method was selected because it is simpler to work with names than with  complex IP addresses     The assignment of a device name for a concrete IO device can be compared with setting the  PROFIBUS address of a DP slave     When it ships  an IO device does not have a device name  An IO device can only be  addressed by an IO controller  for example for the transfer of project engineering data   including the IP address  during startup or for user data exchange in cyclic operation  after it  has been assigned a device name with the PG PC      CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05    Glossary       Diagnostic buffer    The diagnostics buffer represents a buffered memory area in the CPU  It stores diagnostic  events in the order of their occurrence     Diagnostic Interrupt    Modules capable 
159. in IEC 61158  EN 50170   volume 2  PROFIBUS     The term DPV   1 is defined as a functional extension of the acyclical services  to include new  interrupts  for example  provided by the DP protocol     All CPUs with DP interface s  and serving as DP masters feature the enhanced DPV1  functionality        Note    If you want to use the CPU as an intelligent slave  remember that it does not have DPV1  functionality        Requirement for using the DPV1 functionality with DP slaves    For DPV1 slaves from other vendors  you will need a GSD file conforming to EN 50170   revision 3 or later     Extended functions of DPV1    3 32    e Use of any DPV1 slaves from external vendors  in addition to the existing DPVO and  S7 slaves  of course      e Selective handling of DPV1 specific interrupt events by new interrupt blocks     e Reading writing SFBs that conform to standards to the data record  although this can only  be used for centralized modules      e User friendly SFB for reading diagnostics     CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05    Communication       3 4 DPV1    Interrupt blocks with DPV1 functionality                                  Table 3 13 Interrupt blocks with DPV1 functionality  OB Functionality  OB 40 Process interrupt  OB 55 Status interrupt  OB 56 Update interrupt  OB 57 Vendor specific interrupt  OB 82 Diagnostic interrupt  Note    You can now also use organizational blocks OB40 and OB82 for DPV1 interrupts        System b
160. ing  Diagnostics with the  help of Status and Error LEDs    Power supply connection    Each CPU is equipped with a double pole power supply socket  The connector with screw  terminals is inserted into this socket when the CPU is delivered     CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  2 8 Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05       Operating and display elements       2 2 Operating and display elements  CPU 31x    2 2 3 Operating and display elements  CPU 31x 2 PN DP    Operating and display elements     1              k   BF1 fj SF    BF2 fo     DCSV A  le  FRCE                                                                                                                                                                               2  RX TX MAC ADD    3 X1 X2 X3  X4 X5 X6  Ee  X2 f   The figures show the following CPU elements   1  Bus error indicators   2  Status and error displays   3  Slot for the Micro Memory Card  MMC   incl  the ejector   4  Mode selector switch   5  Status display of 2nd interface  X2    6  2  Interface X2  PN    7  Power supply connection   8  1  Interface X1  MPI DP                 CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05 2 9    Operating and display elements       2 2 Operating and display elements  CPU 31x    Slot for the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card  MMC     A SIMATIC Micro Memory Card  MMC  is used as memory module  You can use MMCs as  load memory and as portable storage medium        Note    These CPUs do not ha
161. ing status is signaled in the master s diagnostic interrupt OB 82 via  this address for CPU 31xC 2DP acting as an intelligent slave        Note    Reading diagnostics data with SFC 13  DPNRM_DG    The originally assigned diagnostics address still works  Internally  STEP 7 assigns this  address to slot 0        When using SFC51  RDSYSST   for example  to read module status information or module  rack station status information  you must also consider the change in slot significance as well  as the additional slot 0     CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05 A 5    Appendix       A 7 Information about upgrading to a CPU 31xC or CPU 31x    A 1 6 Reusing existing hardware configurations    Reusing existing hardware configurations    If you reuse the configuration of a CPU 312 IFM to 318 2 DP for a CPU 31xC 31x  the CPU  31xC 31x may not run correctly     If this is the case  you will have to replace the CPU in the STEP 7 hardware configuration  editor  When you replace the CPU  STEP 7 will automatically accept all the settings  if  appropriate and possible      A 1 7 Replacing a CPU 31xC 31x    Replacing a CPU 31xC 31x  When supplied  the CPU 31xC 31x adds a connecting plug to the power supply connector     You no longer need to disconnect the cables of the CPU when you replace a 31xC   31x  CPU  Insert a screwdriver with 3 5 mm blade into the right side of the connector to open the  interlock mechanism  then unplug it from the CPU  Once you
162. ion    PROFINET System Manual  System Description      Installation and Commissioning       Table 1 8 Software       Information on      Software requirements of my S7 300 system          is available in        CPU 31xC and CPU 31x Manual  Technical Data      Technical Data       CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05    1 3             Guide to the S7 300 documentation       Table 1 9 Supplementary features       Information on    How to implement monitor and modify functions   Human Machine Interface     is available in       For text based displays  The relevant Manual  For Operator Panels  The relevant Manual  For WinCC  The relevant Manual       How to integrate process control modules    For PCS7  The relevant Manual       What options are offered by redundant and fail safe  systems      7 400H Manual     Redundant Systems  Fail Safe Systems Manual       Information to be observed when migrating from PROFIBUS  DP to PROFINET IO          Programming Manual  From PROFIBUS DP to PROFINET  IO       1 4    CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05       Operating and display elements 2    2 1 Operating and display elements  CPU 31xC    Operating and display elements of CPU 31xC    0                                      MMC         a                                                                Goer    QW  as  Q 2        EER E E E EEO ES E E E EES E AE DE e a e S                                       
163. ions   Table 3 3 Client and server in S7 communication  using connections with unilateral   bilateral  configuration  CPU Use in server mode for Use in server mode for Use as client  connections with unilateral connections with bilateral  configuration configuration  31xC  gt   V1 0 0   Always possible at the Only possible with CP Only possible with CP  MPI DP interface  without and loadable FBs  and loadable FBs   programming the user  interface  31x  gt   V2 0 0 Always possible at the Only possible with CP Only possible with CP  MPI DP interface  without and loadable FBs  and loadable FBs   programming the user  interface  31x  gt   V2 2 0 Always possible at the e Possible at PN e Possible at PN  MPI DP interface  without interface with interface with  programming the user loadable FBs  or loadable FBs  or  interface e with CP and loadable  e with CP and  FBs  loadable FBs   The user interface is implemented using standard function modules  FBs  from the standard  library of STEP 7  under communication blocks   Reference       3 8    For further information on communication  refer to the Communication with SIMATIC  manual     CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05    Communication  3 2 Communication services       3 2 6 Global data communication  MPI only     Properties    Global data communication is used for cyclic exchange of global data via MPI subnets  for  example     Q  M  between SIMATIC S7 CPUs  data exchange without acknowled
164. ircuits 8   e Number of GD packets Max  8      Sending stations Max  8      Receiving stations Max  8   e Length of GD packets max  22 bytes      Consistent data 22 bytes   S7 basic communication Yes       e User data per request    max  76 bytes              Consistent data 76 bytes  S7 communication Yes  e As server Yes       e as client    Yes  via integrated PN interface and loadable  FBs  or even via CP and loadable FBs        e User data per request      Consistent data    See the STEP 7 Online Help  Common  parameters of SFBs FBs and SFC FC of the S7  communication         5 compatible communication    Yes  via CP and loadable FCs                       Number of connections 16  can be used for  e PG communication Max  15      Reserved  default  1      Configurable 1 to 15  e OP communication Max  15      Reserved  default  1      Configurable 1to15  e S7 based communication Max  14      Reserved  default  0      Configurable 0 to 14             CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05    Technical data of CPU 31x                                                                                                 7 5 CPU 315 2 PN DP  Technical data  Routing Yes  e Interface X1 configured as      MPI Max  10      DP master Max  24      DP slave  active  Max  14  e Interface X2 configured as PROFINET Max  24  CBA  at 50   communication load   e Maximum data length for arrays and  structures between two partners      Acyclic PROFINET interco
165. l status at an input module changes during program execution  the signal  status in the process image is maintained until the image is updated in the next cycle   Moreover  since the process image is stored in CPU system memory  access is significantly  faster than direct access to the signal modules     CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05 4 5    Memory concept       4 1 Memory areas and retentivity    Process image update    The operating system updates the process image periodically  The figure below shows the  sequence of this operation within a cycle     Gane    Startup             PIO    as    ce  D  User program    m  5  ae                               CCP  OS              ie            Cycle time    Startup program    Processing the user program  OB 1   and all programs called inside of it     Reading the inputs from the modules  and refreshing the data in the process  image of the inputs     Writing the process image of the outputs  into the modules     CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05    Memory concept       4 1 Memory areas and retentivity    Configurable process image with CPU317  FW V2 3 0 or higher     IN STEP 7  you can define a user specific size of the I O process images between 0 to 2048  for a CPU317  FW V2 3 0 or higher     Note the information below        Note    Currently  the dynamic setting of the process image only affects its update at the scan cycle  control poin
166. le for  industrial environments  temperature  immunity to noise etc      e Use of TCP IP and IT standards  e Automation with real time Ethernet  e Total integration of field bus systems    Implementation of PROFINET by us  We have integrated PROFINET as follows   e We have chosen PROFINET IO for integrated communication between field devices     e We integrated communication between PLCs of distributed systems  with PROFINET CBA  Component Based automation      e Installation engineering and network components are available in SIMATIC NET     e For remote maintenance and network diagnostics  we used the proven IT standards from  the office world  for example  SNMP   Simple Network Management Protocol for network  configuration and diagnostics      Documentation of PROFIBUS International on the Internet    On the Internet at  wWww profibus com  of PROFIBUS International  previously PROFIBUS  User Organization  PUO  you can find numerous articles relating to PROFINET     For further information  refer to the Internet URL  www siemens com profinet          What is PROFINET 10     Within the framework of PROFINET  PROFINET IO is a communication concept for the  implementation of modular  distributed applications     PROFINET IO allows you to create automation solutions  which are familiar to you from  PROFIBUS     That is  you have the same application view in STEP 7  regardless of whether you configure  PROFINET or PROFIBUS devices     What is PROFINET CBA  Component based Autom
167. le result or state        When several danger levels apply  the notices of the highest level  lower number  are always displayed  If a  notice refers to personal damages with the safety alert symbol  then another notice may be added warning of  property damage     Qualified Personnel    The device system may only be set up and operated in conjunction with this documentation  Only qualified  personnel should be allowed to install and work on the equipment  Qualified persons are defined as persons who  are authorized to commission  to earth  and to tag circuits  equipment and systems in accordance with  established safety practices and standards     Intended Use    A    Trademarks    Please note the following        Warning    This device and its components may only be used for the applications described in the catalog or  technical description  and only in connection with devices or components from other manufacturers  approved or recommended by Siemens     This product can only function correctly and safely if it is transported  stored  set up and installed  correctly  and operated and maintained as recommended        All designations marked with    are registered trademarks of Siemens AG  Other designations in this  documentation might be trademarks which  if used by third parties for their purposes  might infringe upon the  rights of the proprietors     Copyright Siemens AG  2004 All rights reserved Disclaimer of Liability   Reproduction  transmission or use of this documen
168. le step Yes  Breakpoints 2  Diagnostic buffer Yes       CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05    Technical data of CPU 31x       7 3 CPU 314       Technical data                         e Number of entries  not configurable  Max  100  Communication functions  PG OP communication Yes  Global data communication Yes  e Number of GD circuits 4  e Number of GD packets Max  4      Sending stations Max  4      Receiving stations Max  4  e Length of GD packets max  22 bytes      Consistent data 22 bytes  S7 basic communication Yes       e User data per request      Consistent data    max  76 bytes  76 bytes  for X_SEND or X_RCV   64 bytes  for X_PUT or X_GET as the server        S7 communication    Yes       e As server    Yes       e as client    Yes  via CP and loadable FBs        e User data per request    Max  180  for PUT GET                                 Consistent data 64 bytes   5 compatible communication Yes  via CP and loadable FCs   Number of connections 12  can be used for  e PG communication Max  11       Reserved  default  4       Configurable 1to11  e OP communication Max  11       Reserved  default  1       Configurable 1 to 11  e S7 based communication Max  8       Reserved  default  8       Configurable 0 to 8  Routing No  Interfaces       1st interface       Type of interface    Integrated RS485 interface                            Physics RS 485  electrically isolated No   Interface power supply max  200 mA   15 to 30 VDC 
169. lf to the lowest speed at the ports and forwards the  signals to all connected devices  A hub is also not capable of giving priority to signals  This  would lead to a high communication load on Industrial Ethernet     See Switch    Industrial Ethernet    Industrial Ethernet  formerly SINEC H1  is a technology that allows data to be transmitted  free of interference in an industrial environment     Due to the openness of PROFINET  you can use standard Ethernet components  We  recommend  however  that you install PROFINET as Industrial Ethernet     See Fast Ethernet    Instance data block    The STEP 7 user program assigns an automatically generated DB to every call of a function  block  The instance data block stores the values of inputs   outputs and in out parameters  as  well as local block data     Interface  MPI capable  See MPI    Interrupt    The CPU s operating system knows 10 different priority classes for controlling user program  execution  These priority classes include interrupts  e g  process interrupts  When an  interrupt is triggered  the operating system automatically calls an assigned OB  In this OB  the user can program the desired response  e g  in an FB      Interrupt  cyclic interrupt    A cyclic interrupt is generated periodically by the CPU in a configurable time pattern  A  corresponding OB will be processed     CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Glossary 8 Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05    Glossary       Interrupt  delay    The delay inter
170. locks with DPV1 functionality    Table 3 14    System function blocks with DPV 1 functionality       SFB  SFB 52    Functionality  Read data record from DP slave or centralized module       SFB 53    Write data record to DP slave or centralized module       SFB 54    Read additional alarm information from a DP slave or a centralized module in the  relevant OB           SFB 75          Set any interrupts for intelligent slaves          Note    You can also use SFB 52 to SFB 54 for centralized I O modules  SFBs 52 to 54 can also be  used for PN IO        Reference    For further information on the blocks mentioned earlier  refer to the reference manual  System Software for S7 300 400  System and Standard Software  or directly to the  STEP 7 Online Help     See also    PROFIBUS DP  Page 3 2       CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05 3 33    Communication       3 4 DPV1    CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  3 34 Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05    Memory concept 4    4 1 Memory areas and retentivity    4 1 1 CPU memory areas  The three memory areas of your CPU     Memory of the CPU    P wee Loading memory    eee T  located on the MMC           System memory             Working memory          Load memory    The load memory is located on a Micro Memory Card  MMC   The size of the load memory  corresponds exactly to the size of the MMC  It is used to store code blocks  data blocks and  system data  configuration  connections  modul
171. m  the corresponding  blocks FB 8  FB 9  FB 12      FB 15 and FC 62 have at least version V1 1 and family type  CPU_300      Procedure    1  Download and overwrite the old FBs FCs in your program container with the  corresponding blocks from the standard library     2  Update the corresponding block calls  including updating the instance DBs  in your user  program     CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  A 10 Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05    Glossary    Accumulator    Address    Analog module    Application    ASIC    Backplane bus    Accumulators represent CPU register and are used as buffer memory for download  transfer   comparison  calculation and conversion operations     An address is the identifier of a specific address or address area  Examples  Input   12 1   Flag Word MW 25  Data Block DB 3     Analog modules convert process values  e g  temperature  into digital values which can be  processing in the CPU  or they convert digital values into analog manipulated variables     An application is a program that runs directly on the MS DOS   Windows operating system   Applications on the PG include  for example  the STEP 5 basic package  GRAPH 5 and  others     See User program    ASIC is the acronym for Application Specific Integrated Circuits     PROFINET ASICs are components with a wide range of functions for the development of  your own devices  They implement the requirements of the PROFINET standard in a circuit  and allow extremely high packing densities
172. mmunication Max  5      Reserved  default  1      Configurable from 1 to 5  e OP communication Max  5      Reserved  default  1      Configurable from 1 to 5  e S7 based communication Max  2      Reserved  default  2      Configurable from 0 to 2  Routing No  Interfaces       1st interface       Type of interface    Integrated RS485 interface                                  Physics RS 485  electrically isolated No   Interface power supply max  200 mA   15 to 30 VDC    Functionality   e MPI Yes   e PROFIBUS DP No   e Point to point communication No       CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05    Technical data of CPU 31x       7 2 CPU 312       Technical data                                     MPI  Services  e PG OP communication Yes  e Routing No  e Global data communication Yes  e S7 basic communication Yes  e S7 communication      As server Yes      As client No  e Transmission rates 187 5 kbps  Programming  Programming language LAD FBD STL  Available instructions See the Instruction List  Nesting levels 8       System functions  SFCs     See the Instruction List       System function blocks  SFBs     See the Instruction List       User program security    Yes       Dimensions       Mounting dimensions W x H x D  mm     40 x 125 x 130             Weight 270g  Voltages and currents  Power supply  rated value  24 VDC       e Permitted range    20 4 V to 28 8 V       Current consumption  no load operation     Typically 60 mA            
173. mmunication No  MPI  Services  e PG OP communication Yes  e Routing No  e Global data communication Yes  e  7 basic communication Yes  e S7 communication      As server Yes      As client No  e Transmission rates max  187 5 kbps  Programming  Programming language LAD FBD STL  Available instructions see the Instruction List  Nesting levels 8  System functions  SFCs  see the Instruction List  System function blocks  SFBs  see the Instruction List  User program security Yes  Integrated I O  e Default addresses of the integrated      Digital inputs 124 0 to 125 1      Digital outputs 124 0 to 124 5  Integrated functions  Counters 2 channels  see the Manual Technological  Functions   Frequency counters 2 channels  max  10 kHz  see the Manual  Technological Functions   Pulse outputs 2 channels for pulse width modulation  max   2 5 kHz  see the Manual 7echnological  Functions   Controlled positioning No  Integrated  Controlling  SFB No  Dimensions  Mounting dimensions W x H x D  mm  80 x 125 x 130  Weight 409 g  Voltages and currents  Power supply  rated value  24 VDC  e Permitted range 20 4 V to 28 8 V  Current consumption  no load operation  Typically 60 mA  Inrush current Typically 11 A  Power consumption  nominal value  500 mA          CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05 6 7    Technical data of CPU 31xC                            6 3 CPU 313C  Technical data  12t 0 7 A s  External fusing of power supply lines LS switch Type C min  2 A  
174. n 08 2004  A5E00105475 05    Communication       3 7 Interfaces       Note   for DP interface in slave mode only     When you disable the Commissioning   Debug mode   Routing check box in the DP interface  properties dialog in STEP 7  all user specific transmission rate settings will be ignored  and  the transmission rate of the master is automatically set instead  This disables the routing  function at this interface        Devices capable of PROFIBUS DP communication    Reference    PG PC   OP TP   DP slaves   DP masters   Actuators Sensors    7 300 S7 400 with PROFIBUS DP interface    Further information on PROFIBUS  http   Awww profibus com    3 1 3 PROFINET  PN     Availability    CPUs with a    PtP    name suffix are equipped with a PtP X2 interface  X2     Connecting to Industrial Ethernet    You can use the integrated PROFINET interface of the CPU to establish a connection to  Industrial Ethernet     The integrated PROFINET interface of the CPU can be configured via MPI or PROFINET     Requirements    CPUs with FW 2 3 0 or higher  for example CPU 315 2 PN DP   STEP 7 V5 3   Servicepack 1 or higher    CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05 3 3    Communication       3 7 Interfaces    Devices capable of PROFINET  PN  communication    e PROFINET IO components  for example  interface module IM 151 3 PN in an ET 200S     e   7 300   S7 400 with PROFINET interface  for example  CPU 317 2 PN DP or  CP 343 1 PN     e Active network compo
175. n times       5 2 Cycle time    Operating system processing time at the scan cycle checkpoint    The table below shows the operating system processing time at the scan cycle checkpoint of  the CPUs  These times are calculated without taking into consideration times for     e Testing and commissioning routines  e g  status controlling of variables or block status  functions    e Transfer and deletion of blocks  compressing user program memory  e Communication  e Read write access to the MMC  using SFC82 to 84    Table 5 6 Operating system processing time at the scan cycle checkpoint                                  CPU Cycle control at the scan cycle check point  CCP   312C 500 us  313C 500 us  313C 2 500 us  314C 2 500 us  312 500 us  314 500 us  315 500 us  317 150 us          Extension of the cycle time as a result of nested interrupts  Enabled interrupts also extend cycle time  Details are found in the table below     Table 5 7 Extended cycle time due to nested interrupts                                        Interrupt type   Process Diagnostic Time of day Delay interrupt   Watchdog  interrupt Interrupt interrupt interrupt   312C 700 us 700 us 600 us 400 us 250 us  313C 500 us 600 us 400 us 300 Us 150 us  313C 2 500 us 600 us 400 us 300 us 150 us  314C 2 500 us 600 us 400 us 300 us 150 us  312 700 us 700 us 600 us 400 us 250 us  314 500 us 600 us 400 us 300 us 150 us  315 500 us 600 us 400 us 300 us 150 us  317 190 us 240 us 200 us 150 us 90 us                The program 
176. nents  a switch  for example   e PG PC with network card    Properties of PROFINET interface X2    Reference    See also    3 4                               Properties   IEEE standard 802 3   Connector design RJ45   Transmission speed Max  100 Mbps   Media Twisted Pair Cat5  100BASE TX   Note    Networking PROFINET components    The use of switches  rather than hubs  for networking PROFINET components brings about  a substantial improvement in decoupling bus traffic  and improves runtime performance  under higher bus load  PROFINET CBA with cyclic PROFINET interconnections requires the  use of switches in order to maintain compliance with performance specifications  Full duplex  mode at 100 Mbps is mandatory for cyclic PROFINET interconnections     PROFINET IO also requires the use of switches and 100 Mbps full duplex mode        e For information on how to configure the integrated PROFINET interface of the CPU  refer  to the S7 300  CPU 31xC and CPU 31x Installation operating manual     e For details on PROFINET  refer to the PROFINET System Description    e For detailed information on Ethernet networks  network configuration and network  com ae a to the S MA i tis T Manual  Twisted Pair and Fiber Optic Networks     vailable article ID 87637 n the Intern    et URL  http  reverie siemens  iu PET TIE EREE    e Tutorial  Commissioning Component Based Automation Systems  article ID 14142554    e Further information on PROFINET  http   www profibus com       PROFINET IO System  
177. new device     Please note that problems may occur while downloading your user program to the  new     CPU     If you have used one of the following CPUs in the past                                                     CPU Order number as of version  Firmware Hardware   CPU 312 IFM 6ES7 312 5AC02 0ABO 1 0 0 01  6ES7 312 5AC82 0ABO   CPU 313 6ES7 313 1AD03 0ABO 1 0 0 01   CPU 314 6ES7 314 1AE04 0ABO 1 0 0 01  6ES7 314 1AE84 0ABO   CPU 314 IFM 6ES7 314 5AE03 0ABO 1 0 0 01   CPU 314 IFM 6ES7 314 5AE83 0ABO 1 0 0 01   CPU 315 6ES7 315 1AF03 0ABO 1 0 0 01   CPU 315 2 DP 6ES7 315 2AF03 0ABO 1 0 0 01  6ES7 315 2AF83 0ABO   CPU 316 2 DP 6ES7 316 2AG00 0ABO 1 0 0 01   CPU 318 2 DP 6ES7 318 2AJ00 0ABO V3 0 0 03       CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05       Appendix  A 7 Information about upgrading to a CPU 31xC or CPU 31x           then please note if you upgrade to one of the following CPUs                                                                   CPU Order number From version Hereafter called  Firmware Hardware   312 6ES7312 1AD10 0ABO V2 0 0 01 CPU 31xC 31x  312C 6ES7312 5BD01 0ABO V2 0 0 01   313C 6ES7313 5BE01 0ABO V2 0 0 01   313C 2 PtP 6ES7313 6BE01 0ABO V2 0 0 01   313C 2 DP 6ES7313 6CE01 0ABO V2 0 0 01   314 6ES7314 1AF10 0ABO V2 0 0 01   314C 2 PtP 6ES7314 6BF01 0OABO V2 0 0 01   314C 2 DP 6ES7314 6CF01 0ABO V2 0 0 01   315 2 DP 6ES7315 2AG10 0ABO V2 0 0 01   315 2 PN DP 6ES7315 2EG10 0ABO V2 3 0 01   317 2 DP 6ES7317 2AJ10 O
178. nfigurable from 1 to 7  e S7 basic communication Max  4       Reserved  default  4       Configurable from 0 to 4  Routing No  Interfaces       1st interface       Type of interface    Integrated RS485 interface                                              Physics RS 485  electrically isolated No  Interface power supply Max  200 mA   15 to 30 VDC   Functionality  e MPI Yes  e PROFIBUS DP No  e PtP communication No  MPI  Services  e PG OP communication Yes  e Routing No  e Global data communication Yes  e S7 basic communication Yes  e S7 communication      As server Yes   As client No  but via CP and loadable FBs        e Transmission rates    max  187 5 kbps       Programming             Programming language LAD FBD STL  Available instructions see the Instruction List  Nesting levels 8       System functions  SFCs     see the Instruction List       System function blocks  SFBs     see the Instruction List       User program security          Yes          6 12    CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05    Technical data of CPU 31xC       Reference    6 3 CPU 313C       Technical data  Integrated I O       e Default addresses of the integrated  Digital inputs   Digital outputs       Analog inputs       Analog outputs    124 0 to 126 7  124 0 to 125 7  752 to 761  752 to 755       Integrated functions       Counters    3 channels  see the Manual Technological  Functions        Frequency counters    3 channels  max  30 kHz  see the Manual  Te
179. nge and  communication  PROFINET I O  Component  based Automation  application example of  PROFINET I O and Component based  Automation       Programming Manual  From PROFIBUS DP to PROFINET IO    Guideline for the migration from PROFIBUS DP  to PROFINET I O        Manual  e CPU 31xC  Technological functions  e Examples    Description of the individual technological  functions Positioning  Counting  PtP  communication  rules    The CD contains examples of the technological  functions       Reference Manual  e  7 300 Automation System  Module data    Descriptions of the functions and technical data  of signal modules  power supply modules and  interface modules        Instruction List  e CPU 312 IFM   318 2 DP  e CPU 31xC and CPU 31x    List of CPU instruction resources and the  relevant execution times  List of executable  blocks        Getting Started    The following Getting Started editions are available  as a collective volume     e CPU 31x  Commissioning   e CPU 31xC  Commissioning   e CPU 31xC  Positioning with analog output  e CPU 31xC  Positioning with digital output  e CPU 31xC  Counting   e CPU 31xC  Rules   e CPU 31xC  PtP communication    e CPU 31x 2 PN DP  Commissioning a  PROFINET IO subnet          The example used in this Getting Started  guides you through the various steps in  commissioning required to obtain a fully  functional application           CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05    Preface       Additional inf
180. nication capable systems of  external suppliers  The function also allows adaptation to the protocol of the communication  partner     Reference  Further Information    e on SFCs are found in the  nstruction list   For detailed information  refer to the STEP 7 Online Help   or to the System and Standard  Functions Reference Manual     e on communication are found in the Communication with SIMATIC Manual     CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05 3 15    Communication       3 2 Communication services    3 2 9 Data consistency    Properties    A data area is considered consistent  if the operating system can read write access the data  area in a continuous block  Data exchanged collectively between the stations should belong  together and originate from a single processing cycle  that is  be consistent  If the user  program contains a programmed communication function  for example  access to shared  data with X SEND  X RCV  access to that data area can be coordinated by means of the   BUSY  parameter itself     With PUT GET functions    For S7 communication functions  such as PUT GET or write   read via OP communication   which do not require a block in the user program on the CPU  operating in server mode    allowances must be made in the program for the extent of the data consistency  The  PUT GET functions for S7 communication  or for reading writing variables via OP  communication  are executed at the CPU s scan cycle checkpoint  In or
181. nnectable PROFINET IO devices 128   Max  user data consistency with PROFINET IO 256 bytes  Update Time 1 ms to 512 ms             The minimum value is determined by the set  communication portion for PROFINET IO  the  number of IO devices and the amount of  configured user data                       Routing Yes   S7 protocol functions   e PG functions Yes   e OP functions Yes   e Open IE communication via TCP IP Yes   GSD file The latest GSD file is available at     http   www ad siemens de support    in the Product Support area       Programming                                        Programming language LAD FBD STL  Available instructions See the Instruction List  Nesting levels 8   System functions  SFCs  See the Instruction List  System function blocks  SFBs  See the Instruction List  User program security Yes   Dimensions   Mounting dimensions W x H x D  mm  80 x 125 x 130   Weight 460 g       CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05 7 25    Technical data of CPU 31x       7 6 CPU 317 2 DP       Technical data    Voltages and currents                               Power supply  rated value  24 VDC   e Permitted range 20 4 V to 28 8 V  Current consumption  no load operation  100 mA   Inrush current Typically 2 5A  lt Min  1 A2s  External fusing of power supply lines min  2A   recommended    Power loss Typically 3 5 W       7 6 CPU 317 2 DP    Technical data    Table 7 7 Technical data for the CPU 317 2 DP       Technical data  CPU and 
182. nnections 1400 bytes      Cyclic PROFINET interconnections 450 bytes      Local interconnections Slave dependent  e Number of coupled PROFIBUS devices 16  e Total of all master slave connections 1000  e Number of device internal and PROFIBUS 500  interconnections  e Number of remote interconnecting partners 32  Remote interconnections with acyclical transmission  Scan rate  Minimum scan interval 500 ms  Number of incoming interconnections 100  Number of outgoing interconnections 100  Remote interconnections with cyclical transmission  Scan rate  Minimum scan interval 10 ms  Number of incoming interconnections 200  Number of outgoing interconnections 200  HMI interconnections via PROFINET  acyclic   HMI interconnections 500 ms  Number of HMI variables 200  Sum of all interconnections 4000 bytes input 4000 bytes output  Interfaces  ist interface  Type of interface Integrated RS485 interface  Physics RS 485  electrically isolated Yes  Interface power supply max  200 mA   15 to 30 VDC   Functionality  e MPI Yes  e PROFIBUS DP Yes  e Point to point communication No  e PROFINET No                CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05 7 23    Technical data of CPU 31x       7 5 CPU 315 2 PN DP       Technical data                                                                                  MPI  Services  e PG OP communication Yes  e Routing Yes  e Global data communication Yes  e S7 basic communication Yes  e S7 communication Yes       As s
183. nsions CPU 314C 2 PtP CPU 314C 2 DP  Mounting dimensions W x H x D  mm    120 x 125 x 130  Weight approx  676 g  Voltages and currents CPU 314C 2 PtP CPU 314C 2 DP  Power supply  rated value  24 VDC  e Permitted range 20 4 V to 28 8 V  Current consumption  no load Typically 150 mA  operation   Inrush current Typically 11 A  Power consumption  nominal value  800 mA 1000 mA  It 0 7 As  External fusing of power supply lines LS switch type C min  2 A    recommended  LS switch type B min  4A  Power loss Typically 14 W             CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05 6 27    Technical data of CPU 31xC       6 6 Technical data of the integrated   O    6 6 Technical data of the integrated I O    6 6 1 Arrangement and usage of integrated I Os    Introduction  Integrated I Os of CPUs 31xC can be used for technological functions or as standard I O     The figures below illustrate possible usage of I Os integrated in the CPUs     Reference  Further information on integrated I O is found in the Manual 7echnical Functions     CPU 312C  Pin out of the integrated DI DO  connector X11                                                                                   en ae  X11  Standard   Interrupt Count  input 10  DI X ZO  A  20  Di 0 0  DI X ZO  B  30  DI 0 1  DI X ZO  HW gate   42  DI 0 2  DI X Z1  A  5 DI 0 3  DI X Z1  B  60  DI 0 4  DI X Z1  HW gate   7  DI 0 5  DI X Latch 0 8  DI 0 6  DI X Latch 1 9  DI 0 7  DI xX 10   Dl 1 0  DI X ODIA  120  2M  
184. nt slave    Routing for the CPU 31xC 31x as an intelligent slave    If you use the CPU 31xC 31x as an intelligent slave  the routing function can only be used  with an actively configured DP interface     In the properties of the DP interface in STEP 7  select the  Test  Commissioning  Routing   check box of the  DP Slave  option     CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  A 8 Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05    Appendix  A 1 Information about upgrading to a CPU 31xC or CPU 31x       A 1 12 Changed retentive behavior for CPUs with firmware  gt   V2 1 0    Changed retentive behavior for CPUs with firmware  gt   V2 1 0  For data blocks for these CPUs  e you can set the retentive response in the block properties of the DB     e Using SFC 82  CREA_DBL    gt  Parameter ATTRIB  NON_RETAIN bit  you can specify if  the actual values of a DB should be maintained at POWER OFF ON or STOP RUN   retentive DB  or if the start values should be read from the load memory  non retentive  DB      A 1 13 FMs CPs with separate MPI address in the central rack of a CPU 315 2 PN DP      CPU 317    FMs CPs with separate MPI address in the central rack of a CPU 315 2 PN DP   CPU 317       All CPUs  except CPU 315 2 PN DP  CPU 317  and CPU 318 2 DP    If there are FM CPs with their own MPI address in  the central rack of an S7 300  then they are in the  exact same CPU subnet as the CPU MPI station     CPU 315 2 PN DP  CPU 317 and CPU 318 2 DP    If there are FM CPs with their own MPI address  in t
185. of diagnostics operations report detected system errors to the CPU by  means of diagnostic interrupts     Diagnostics  See System diagnostics  DP master  A master which behaves in accordance with EN 50170  Part 3 is known as a DP master   DP slave  A slave operated on PROFIBUS with PROFIBUS DP protocol and in accordance with EN  50170  Part 3 is referred to as DP slave   DPV1    The designation DPV1 means extension of the functionality of the acyclical services  to  include new interrupts  for example  provided by the DP protocol  The DPV1 functionality has  been incorporated into IEC 61158 EN 50170  volume 2  PROFIBUS     Electrically isolated    The reference potential of the control and on load power circuits of isolated I O modules is  electrically isolated  for example  by optocouplers  relay contact or transformer  I O circuits  can be interconnected with a root circuit     Equipotential bonding    Electrical connection  equipotential bonding conductor  which eliminates potential difference  between electrical equipment and external conductive bodies by drawing potential to the  same or near the same level  in order to prevent disturbing or dangerous voltages between  these bodies     Error display    One of the possible reactions of the operating system to a runtime error is to output an error  message  Further reactions  Error reaction in the user program  CPU in STOP     Error handling via OB    After the operating system has detected a specific error  e g  access er
186. of routing connections for DP CPUS    sssssseerreserrrisecrreerirrueseennesernneeernnaerennestennnaas 3 12  New System Standard Functions of PROFINET IO and PROFIBUS DP and   Those That Must Be Replaced                ccccccccsecccceceeeeeeeeeecaeceeeeeeeeecaaanaeeeeeeeeeseseeaeeeeeeeeeeensenaeess 3 21   System and Standard Functions in PROFIBUS DP that must be Implemented with   Different Functions in PROFINET 10 00 0000    cececeeeeeeeeeeeene eter entree ee eaeeeeesaeeeeeeeaeeeeesaeeeereneeeeees 3 22  OBs in PROFINET IO and PROFIBUS DP              ccc ccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeceaeeeceeeseeeeseaeeeenaeeseeeetaas 3 22  Comparison of the System Status Lists of PROFINET and PROFIBUS n se 3 23  Distribution  Of COMMECUONS ssas ATEA N A 3 29  Availability of connection resources         ssesssessesrrnnrsnnesesnnenrannaannnnaatannaneennnatannaaannnnaatannaannnnaana 3 30  Number of routing connection resources  for DP PN CPUS         seseseeeeseeserresrrssrrssrresrrssres 3 31   Interrupt blocks with DPV1 functionality    ccc eeeeeeeeeeeeee ee eeneee eee eaeeeeeeaeeeeetaeeeeetieeeeee 3 33  System function blocks with DPV1 functionality   0 0 0    eeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaeeeeeenaeeeeseaees 3 33    CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05    Table of contents       Table 4 1  Table 4 2  Table 4 3  Table 4 4  Table 5 1  Table 5 2  Table 5 3  Table 5 4  Table 5 5  Table 5 6  Table 5 7  Table 5 8  Table 5 9  Table 5 10  Table 5 11  Table 5 12  Ta
187. olated Yes   Type of interface Integrated RS485 interface  Interface power supply  15 to 30 VDC  max  200 mA  Functionality   MPI No  PROFIBUS DP Yes  Point to point communication No   DP master   Services   e PG OP communication Yes   e Routing Yes   e Global data communication No   e S7 basic communication No   e S7 communication No   e Constant bus cycle time Yes   e SYNC FREEZE Yes   e DPV1 Yes  Transmission speed Up to 12 Mbps  Number of DP slaves 124          Address area          max  244 bytes       CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05    7 31    Technical data of CPU 31x       7 6 CPU 317 2 DP       Technical data  DP slave   except for DP slave at both interfaces        Services       e PG OP communication    Yes                   e Routing Yes  only if interface is active   e Global data communication No   e S7 basic communication No   e S7 communication No   e Direct data exchange Yes       e Transmission rates    Up to 12 Mbps       e Automatic baud rate search    Yes  only if interface is passive        e Intermediate memory    244 bytes     244 bytes O       e Address areas    max  32 with max  32 bytes each       e DPV1    No       GSD file    The latest GSD file is available at     http   www ad siemens de support    in the Product Support area       Programming             Programming language LAD FBD STL  Available instructions See the Instruction List  Nesting levels 8       System functions  SFCs     See the Instru
188. om another by means of a block call  Nesting depth is referred to as  the number of simultaneously called code blocks     Network    A network is a larger communication system that allows data exchange between a large  number of nodes     All the subnets together form a network     A network consists of one or more interconnected subnets with any number of nodes   Several networks can exist alongside each other     Non isolated    The reference potential of the control and on load power circuits of non isolated I O modules  is electrically interconnected     OB  See Organization blocks    OB priority    The CPU operating system distinguishes between different priority classes  for example   cyclic program execution  process interrupt controlled program processing  Each priority  class is assigned organization blocks  OBs  in which the S7 user can program a response   The OBs are assigned different default priority classes  These determine the order in which  OBs are executed or interrupt each other when they appear simultaneously     Operating state  SIMATIC S7 automation systems know the following operating states  STOP  START  RUN     Operating system    The CPU OS organizes all functions and processes of the CPU which are not associated to  a specific control task     See CPU    Organization blocks    Organization blocks  OBs  form the interface between CPU operating system and the user  program  OBs determine the sequence for user program execution     Parameters    1  Va
189. on       Transmission rates    38 4 kbps half duplex  19 2 kbps full duplex       Cable length    Max  1200 m       User program can control the interface    Yes       The interface can trigger a break or an  interrupt in the user program    Yes  message with break ID        Protocol driver    3964 R   ASCII       Programming    CPU 313C 2 PtP       CPU 313C 2 DP             Programming language LAD FBD STL  Available instructions see the Instruction List  Nesting levels 8       System functions  SFCs     see the Instruction List       System function blocks  SFBs     see the Instruction List       User program security    Yes       Integrated I O    CPU 313C 2 PtP       CPU 313C 2 DP          Default addresses of the integrated      Digital inputs      Digital outputs       124 0 to 125 7  124 0 to 125 7          CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05    6 19    Technical data of CPU 31xC  6 4 CPU 313C 2 PtP and CPU 313C 2 DP          Technical data    CPU 313C 2 PtP CPU 313C 2 DP    Integrated functions                                                                               Counters 3 channels  see the Manual 7echnological Functions    Frequency counters 3 channels  max  30 kHz  see the Manual 7echnological Functions   Pulse outputs 3 channels for pulse width modulation  max  2 5 kHz  see the Manual   Technological Functions    Controlled positioning No   Integrated  Controlling  SFB PID controller  see the Manual Technological F
190. on for PROFINET IO  the  number of IO devices and the amount of  configured user data        S7 protocol functions                e PG functions Yes  e OP functions Yes  e Open IE communication via TCP IP Yes  GSD file The latest GSD file is available at     http   www ad siemens de support    in the Product Support area       Programming                                        Programming language LAD FBD STL  Available instructions See the Instruction List  Nesting levels 8   System functions  SFCs  See the Instruction List  System function blocks  SFBs  See the Instruction List  User program security Yes   Dimensions   Mounting dimensions W x H x D  mm  80 x 125 x 130   Weight 460 g       CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05 7 39    Technical data of CPU 31x       7 7 CPU 317 2 PN DP    7 40       Technical data    Voltages and currents                               Power supply  rated value  24 VDC   e Permitted range 20 4 V to 28 8 V  Current consumption  no load operation  100 mA   Inrush current Typically 2 5A  lt Min  1 A2s  External fusing of power supply lines min  2A   recommended    Power loss Typically 3 5 W       CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05       Appendix    A 1 Information about upgrading to a CPU 31xC or CPU 31x    A 1 1 Area of applicability    Who should read this information     You are already using a CPU from the SIEMENS S7 300 series and now want to upgrade to    a 
191. onnect a maximum of one PROFINET  device or a further switch     CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05    Glossary       System diagnostics    System diagnostics refers to the detection  evaluation and signaling of errors which occur  within the PLC  Examples of such error faults include  Program errors or failures on modules   System errors can be indicated by LEDs or in STEP 7     System function    A system function  SFC  is a    gt  function integrated in the operating system of the CPU that  can be called when necessary in the STEP 7 user program     System function block    A system function block  SFB  is a    gt  function block integrated in the operating system of  the CPU that can be called when necessary in the STEP 7 user program     System memory    System memory is an integrated RAM memory in the CPU  System memory contains the  address areas  e g  timers  counters  flag bits  and data areas that are required internally by  the operating system  for example  communication buffers      System status list    The system status list contains data that describes the current status of an S7 300  You can  always use this list to obtain an overview of     e The configuration of the S7 300  e the current CPU configuration and configurable signal modules    e the current status and processes in the CPU and in configurable signal modules     Terminating resistor  The terminating resistor is used to avoid reflections on data links    
192. onnections to a partner     e The performance can drop by up to 50   if the values are distributed to different  frequency levels     e The use of data structures and arrays in an interconnection instead of many single    interconnections with simple data structures increases the performance     CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data    Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05 5 13    Cycle and reaction times       5 3 Response time    5 3 Response time    5 3 1 Overview    Definition of response time    The response time is the time between the detection of an input signal and the change of a  linked output signal     Fluctuation width    The physical response time lies between the shortest and the longest response time  You  must always reckon with the longest response time when configuring your system     The shortest and longest response times are shown below  to give you an idea of the  fluctuation width of the response time     Factors  The response time depends on the cycle time and following factors   e Delay of the inputs and outputs of signal modules or integrated I O   e Additional update times for PROFINET IO  e additional DP cycle times on PROFIBUS DP  e Execution in the user program  Reference    e The delay times are located in the specifications of the signal modules   Module data Reference Manual      Update times for PROFINET IO    If you configured your PROFINET IO system in STEP 7  STEP 7 calculates the update time  for PROFINET IO  You can then view the PROF
193. ons 1000  e Number of device internal and PROFIBUS 500   interconnections  e Number of remote interconnecting partners 32  Remote interconnections with acyclical transmission  Scan rate  Minimum scan interval 500 ms  Number of incoming interconnections 100  Number of outgoing interconnections 100  Remote interconnections with cyclical transmission  Scan rate  Minimum scan interval 10 ms  Number of incoming interconnections 200  Number of outgoing interconnections 200  HMI interconnections via PROFINET  acyclic   HMI interconnections 500 ms  Number of HMI variables 200  Sum of all interconnections 4000 bytes input 4000 bytes output  Interfaces  1st interface  Type of interface Integrated RS485 interface  Physics RS 485  electrically isolated Yes  Interface power supply max  200 mA   15 to 30 VDC   Functionality  e MPI Yes  e PROFIBUS DP Yes  e Point to point communication No  e PROFINET No                CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05 7 37    Technical data of CPU 31x       7 7 CPU 317 2 PN DP       Technical data                                                                                  MPI  Services  e PG OP communication Yes  e Routing Yes  e Global data communication Yes  e S7 basic communication Yes  e S7 communication Yes       As server Yes     As client No  but via CP and loadable FBs   e Transmission rates Max  12 Mbps  DP master  Services  e PG OP communication Yes  e Routing Yes  e Global data communication No  e 
194. ormation required        Name of the manual    Reference Manual    System software for S7 300 400 system and standard  functions    Description  Description of the SFCs  SFBs and OBs     This manual is part of the STEP 7  documentation package  For further  information  refer to the STEP 7 Online  Help        Manual  SIMATIC NET  Twisted Pair and Fiber Optic Networks    Description of Industrial Ethernet  networks  network configuration   components  installation guidelines for  networked automation systems in  buildings  etc        Manual    Component based Automation  Configuring systems with  SIMATIC iMap    Description of the engineering software  iMAP          SIMATIC communication       Manual Programming with STEP 7  Programming with STEP 7 V5 3  Manual Basics  services  networks        communication functions  connecting  PGs OPs  engineering and configuring in  STEP 7           Recycling and Disposal    vi    The devices described in this manual can be recycled  due to their ecologically compatible  components  For environment friendly recycling and disposal of your old equipment  contact    a certified disposal facility for electronic scrap     CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05    Table of contents        PECTS ooo scare eect ga cana ee AAE R EEE A TA TE EET AES E T EA AAT A  Guide to the S7 300 documentation               cc cccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeaaaaeeeeeeeeececeeaeeeeeeeeeseeeeneeeeeeeess 1 1  2
195. ory  The content of  Counter cells  can be modified by  STEP 7 instructions  for example  up down count      See Communication processor    Central processing unit   CPU of the S7 automation system with a control and arithmetic  unit  memory  operating system  and interface for programming device     The cycle time represents the time a CPU requires for one execution of the user program     See Interrupt  cyclic interrupt    Data blocks  DB  are data areas in the user program which contain user data  There are  global data blocks which can be accessed by all code blocks  and instance data blocks  which are assigned to a specific FB call     Static data can only be used within a function block  These data are saved in an instance  data block that belongs to a function block  Data stored in an instance data block are  retained until the next function block call     CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05 Glossary 3    Glossary       Data  temporary    Default Router    Determinism    Device    Device Name    Glossary 4    Temporary data represent local data of a block  They are stored in the L stack when the  block is executed  After the block has been processed  these data are no longer available     The default router is the router that is used when data must be forwarded to a partner  located within the same subnet     In STEP 7  the default router is named Router  STEP 7 assigns the local IP address to the  default router     See Real T
196. oss or illegal block data        4 2 3 Handling with modules    4 2 3 1 Download of new blocks or delta downloads  There are two ways to download additional user blocks or download deltas     e Download of blocks  You already created a user program and downloaded it to the CPU  via MMC  You then want to add new blocks to the user program  In this case  you do not  need to reload the entire user program to the MMC  Rather  you can download only the  new blocks to the MMC  this reduces download times for highly complex programs      e Delta download  In this case  you only download the deltas in the blocks of your user  program  In the next step  perform a delta download of the user program  or only of  changed blocks to the MMC  using the PG PC        AN Warning  The delta download of blocks   user programs overwrites all data stored under the same  name on the MMC        The data of dynamic blocks are transferred to RAM and activated after the block is  downloaded     4 2 3 2 Uploading blocks    Uploading blocks    Other than download operations  an upload operation is the transfer of specific blocks or a  user program from the CPU to the PG PC  The block content is here identical with that of the  last download to the CPU  Dynamic DBs form the exception  because their actual values are  transferred  An upload of blocks or of the user program from the CPU in STEP 7 does not  influence CPU memory     CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  4 12 Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E001054
197. pace           Reference  For detailed information on SFC 82  refer to the System Software for S7 300 400  System  and Standard Functions Reference Manual  or directly to the STEP 7 Online Help   Note  SFC 82 is terminated and an error message is generated if a DB already exists under the  same number in load memory and or RAM   CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  4 17    Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05    Memory concept       4 2 Memory functions    The data written to load memory are portable and retentive on CPU memory reset   Evaluation of measured values     e Measured value DBs saved to load memory can be uploaded and evaluated by other  communication partners  PG  PC  for example         Note    The active system functions SFC 82 to 84  current access to the MMC  have a distinct  influence on PG functions  block status  variable status  load block  upload  open  for  example   This typically reduces performance  compared to passive system functions  by  the factor 10           Note    For CPUs with firmware V2 1 0 or higher  you can also generate non retentive DBs using  SFC 82  parameter ATTRIB   gt  NON_RETAIN bit            Note    As a precaution against loss of data  always make sure that you do not exceed the  maximum number of delete write operations  For further information  refer to the  Technical Data of the Micro Memory Card  MMC  in the General Technical Data of your  CPU           AN Caution   Data on a SIMATIC Micro Memory Card can be corrupted 
198. quested to by the master     See Master    SNMP    SNMP  Simple Network Management Protocol  is the standardized protocol for diagnostics  of the Ethernet network infrastructure and for assignment of parameters to it     Within the office area and in automation engineering  devices of a wide range of vendors  support SNMP on Ethernet     Applications based on SNMP can be operated on the same network at the same time as  applications with PROFINET     The range of functions supported differs depending on the device type  A switch  for  example  has more functions than a CP 1616     STARTUP    A START UP routine is executed at the transition from STOP to RUN mode  Can be  triggered by means of the mode selector switch  or after power on  or by an operator action  on the programming device  An S7 300 performs a restart     CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05 Glossary 19    Glossary       STEP 7    Subnet mask    Subnetwork    Substitute    Substitute value    Switch    Glossary 20    Engineering system  Contains programming software for the creation of user programs for  SIMATIC S7 controllers     The bits set in the subnet mask decides the part of the IP address that contains the address  of the subnet network     In general     e The network address is obtained by an AND operation on the IP address and subnet  mask     e The node address is obtained by an AND NOT operation on the IP address and subnet  mask     All the devices connecte
199. r  example industrial communication for PG PC can take place within the same network     Reduction factor    The reduction rate determines the send receive frequency for GD packets on the basis of the  CPU cycle     Reference ground  See Ground    Reference potential    Voltages of participating circuits are referenced to this potential when they are viewed and or  measured     Repeater    See Hub    CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05 Glossary 17    Glossary       Restart    On CPU start up  e g  after is switched from STOP to RUN mode via selector switch or with  POWER ON   OB100  restart  is initially executed  prior to cyclic program execution  OB1    On restart  the input process image is read in and the STEP 7 user program is executed   starting at the first instruction in OB1     Retentive memory    Router    RT    Runtime error    Segment    SFB    SFC    Glossary 18    A memory area is considered retentive if its contents are retained even after a power loss  and transitions from STOP to RUN  The non retentive area of memory flag bits  timers and  counters is reset following a power failure and a transition from the STOP mode to the RUN  mode     Retentive can be the   e Flag bits   e S7 timers   e S7 counters    e Data areas    A router works in a way similar to a switch  With a router  however  it is also possible to  specify which communications nodes can communicate via the router and which cannot   Communication nodes on
200. r MMC has an internal serial number that provides copy protection at user level  You can  read this serial number from the SSL partial list 011Cxu index 8 using SFC 51  RDSYSST    You can then program a STOP command  for example  in a copy protected block if the  expected and actual serial numbers of your MCC do not tally     Reference  e SSL partial list in the instruction list  or    e inthe manual System and Standard Functions  nformation on CPU memory reset   Operating instructions CPU 31xC and CPU31x  Commissioning  Commissioning  Modules  CPU Memory Reset by means of Mode Selector Switch    Useful life of an MMC  The useful life of an MMC depends mainly on following criteria   1  The number of delete or programming operations   2  External influences such as ambient temperature     At ambient temperatures up to 60   C  a maximum of 100 000 delete write operations can be  performed on an MMC        AN Caution  To prevent loss of data  always make sure that you do not exceed the maximum number of  delete write operations        See also  Operating and display elements  CPU 31xC  Pag e 2 1   Operating and display elements  CPU 312  314  315 2 DP   Page 2 5     Operating and display elements  CPU 317 2 DP  Page 2 7   Operating and display elements  CPU 31x 2 PN DP  Page 2 9     CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  4 10 Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05    Memory concept  4 2 Memory functions       4 2 Memory functions    4 2 1 General  Memory functions    Memory func
201. ramework of PROFINET  PROFINET CBA is an automation concept for the  implementation of applications with distributed intelligence     PROFINET CBA lets you create distributed automation solutions  based on default  components and partial solutions     Component Based Automation allows you to use complete technological modules as  standardized components in complex systems     The components are also created in an engineering tool which may differ from vendor to  vendor  Components of SIMATIC devices are created  for example  with STEP 7     PROFINET Component    A PROFINET component includes the entire data of the hardware configuration  the  parameters of the modules  and the corresponding user program  The PROFINET  component is made up as follows     e Technological Function    The  optional  technological  software  function includes the interface to other PROFINET  components in the form of interconnectable inputs and outputs     e Device    The device is the representation of the physical programmable controller or field device  including the I O  sensors and actuators  mechanical parts  and the device firmware     PROFINET Device    A PROFINET device always has at least one Industrial Ethernet port  A PROFINET device  can also have a PROFIBUS port as a master with proxy functionality     See Device    CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05 Glossary 15    Glossary       PROFINET IO    Within the framework of PROFINET  PROFINET IO i
202. rated in the CPU  or stored on plug in Memory Cards or memory modules  However   the user program is principally processed from the RAM of the CPU     In SIMATIC  a distinction is made between the operating system of the CPU and user  programs  The user program contains all instructions and declarations  as well as signal  processing data that can be controlled by the plant or the process  It is assigned to a  programmable module  for example CPU or FM  and can be structured in smaller units   blocks      See Operating system  See STEP 7    Voltage dependent resistor    CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05    Glossary       WAN    Network with a span beyond that of a local area network allowing  for example   intercontinental operation  Legal rights do not belong to the user but to the provider of the  transmission networks     CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05 Glossary 23    Glossary       CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Glossary 24 Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05    Index    A  Aim of this Documentation  iii    Analog inputs  Configuration  beat   Not connected  6 38   Technical data 6 51   Analog outputs  Not connected  6 38    Technical data  6 53 53    Applicability of this Nal JA 1  A 2   Application area covered by this manual  iii  Application View  3 17   Automation concept  3 17     B  Blocks  3 20    oe me             Communication  CPU services   Data senate arte  3 
203. rdware   CPU 312C CPU 31xC 6ES7312 5BD01 0ABO   V2 0 0 01  CPU 313C 6ES7313 5BE01 0ABO V2 0 0 01  CPU 313C 2 PtP 6ES7313 6BE01 0ABO V2 0 0 01  CPU 313C 2 DP 6ES7313 6CE01 0ABO   V2 0 0 01  CPU 314C 2 PtP 6ES7314 6BF01 0ABO V2 0 0 01  CPU 314C 2 DP 6ES7314 6CF01 0ABO V2 0 0 01  CPU 312 CPU 31x 6ES7312 1AD10 0ABO V2 0 0 01  CPU 314 6ES7314 1AF10 0ABO V2 0 0 01  CPU 315 2 DP 6ES7315 2AG10 0ABO   V2 0 0 01  CPU 315 2 PN DP 6ES7315 2EG10 0ABO   V2 3 0 01  CPU 317 2 DP 6ES7317 2AJ10 0ABO V2 1 0 01  CPU 317 2 PN DP 6ES7317 2EJ10 0ABO V2 3 0 01                            Note    The special features of the CPU 315F 2 DP  6ES7 315 6FF00 0ABO  and CPU 317F 2 DP     6ES7 317 6FFO0 0ABO  are described in their Product Information  available on the Internet    at    http   www siemens com automation service amp support  article ID 17015818     CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05       Preface          Note    There you can obtain the descriptions of all current modules  For new modules  or modules  of a more recent version  we reserve the right to include a Product Information containing  latest information        Approvals  The SIMATIC S7 300 product series has the following approvals   e Underwriters Laboratories  Inc   UL 508  Industrial Control Equipment   e Canadian Standards Association  CSA C22 2 No  142   Process Control Equipment   e Factory Mutual Research  Approval Standard Class Number 3611    CE label    The SIMATIC S7 300 product ser
204. re or CPU memory reset     Retentive data in system memory    In your configuration  Properties of CPU  Retentivity tab   specify which part of memory bits   timers and counters should be kept retentive and which of them are to be initialized with  0   on restart  warm restart      The diagnostic buffer  MPI address  and transmission rate  and operating hour counter data  are generally written to the retentive memory area on the CPU  Retentivity of the MPI  address and baud rate ensures that your CPU can continue to communicate  even after a  power loss  memory reset or loss of communication parameters  e g  due to removal of the  MMC or deletion of communication parameters      CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  4 2 Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05       Memory concept       Retentive data in RAM  Therefore  the contents of retentive DBs are always retentive at restart and POWER    See also    4 1 3    ON OFF     4 1 Memory areas and retentivity    CPUs V2 1 0 or higher also support volatile DBs  the volatile DBs are initialized at restart of  POWER OFF ON with their initial values from load memory      Properties of the Micro Memory Card  MMC   Page 4 9     Retentivity of memory objects    Retentive behavior of memory objects  The table below shows the retentive behavior of memory objects during specific operating    state transitions     Table 4 2 Retentive behavior of memory objects  applies to all CPUs with DP MPI SS     31x 2 PN DP                             
205. retentivity MBO to MB15  Clock flag bits 8  1 byte per flag bit   Data blocks Max  511   DB 1 to DB 511   e Length max  16 KB       Local data per priority class    max  510 bytes                                        Address areas  I O     CPU 314C 2 PtP    Blocks CPU 314C 2 PtP CPU 314C 2 DP  Total 1024  DBs  FCs  FBs   The maximum number of blocks that can be loaded may be reduced if you are  using another MMC   OBs See the Instruction List  e Length max  16 KB  Nesting depth  e Per priority class 8  e additional within an error OB 4  FBs Max  512   FB 0 to FB 511   e Length max  16 KB  FCs Max  512   FC 0 to FC 511   e Length max  16 KB    CPU 314C 2 DP       Total I O address area    max  1024 bytes 1024 bytes   can be freely addressed     max  1024 bytes 1024 bytes   can be freely addressed                                      e Distributed None max  1000 bytes  I O process image 128 bytes 128 bytes 128 bytes 128 bytes  Digital channels Max  1016 Max  8192   e of those local Max  992 Max  992   e Integrated channels 24 DI  16 DO 24 DI   16 DO  Analog channels Max  253 Max  512   e of those local Max  248 Max  248   e Integrated channels 4 1Al 2 AO 4 1Al 2 AO  Assembly CPU 314C 2 PtP CPU 314C 2 DP  Racks Max  4       Modules per rack    max  8  max  7 in rack 3       Number of DP masters                      e Integrated No 1  e viaCP Max  1 Max  1  CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  6 22 Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05       Technical data of CPU 31xC       
206. riable of a STEP 7 code block  2  Variable for declaring module response  one or several per module   All modules have a    CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Glossary 12 Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05    Glossary       suitable basic factory setting which can be customized in STEP 7   There are static and dynamic parameters    Parameters  dynamic    Unlike static parameters  you can change dynamic module parameters during runtime by  calling an SFC in the user program  e g  limit values of an analog signal input module     Parameters  static    PC station    PG    PLC    PNO    Priority class    Process image    Unlike dynamic parameters  static parameters of modules cannot be changed by the user  program  You can only modify these parameters by editing your configuration in STEP 7  for  example  modification of the input delay parameters of a digital signal input module     See SIMATIC PC Station    See Programming device    Programmable controllers  PLCs  are electronic controllers whose function is saved as a  program in the control unit  Therefore  the configuration and wiring of the unit does not  dependend on the PLC function  A programmable logic controller has the structure of a  computer  it consists of a CPU with memory  input output modules and an internal bus  system  The I O and the programming language are oriented to control engineering needs     A PLC in the context of SIMATIC S7    gt  is a programmable logic controller   See CPU    See PROFIBUS 
207. ror with STEP 7   it  calls a dedicated block  Error OB  that determines further CPU actions     CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05 Glossary 5    Glossary       Error response    ERTEC    Fast Ethernet    FB    FC    Flag bits    Flash EPROM    Force    Function    Glossary 6    Reaction to a runtime error  Reactions of the operating system  It sets the automation  system to STOP  indicates the error  or calls an OB in which the user can program a  reaction     See AS C    Fast Ethernet describes the standard with which data is transmitted at 100 Mbps  Fast  Ethernet uses the 100 Base T standard     See Function block    See Function    Flag bits are part of the CPU s system memory  They store intermediate results of  calculations  They can be accessed in bit  word or dword operations     FEPROMSs can retain data in the event of power loss  same as electrically erasable  EEPROMs  However  they can be erased within a considerably shorter time  FEPROM    Flash Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory   They are used on Memory Cards     The Force function can be used to assign the variables of a user program or CPU  also   inputs and outputs  constant values     In this context  please note the limitations listed in the Overview of the test functions section  in the chapter entitled Test functions  Diagnostics and Troubleshooting in the S7 300   nstallation manual     According to IEC 1131 3  a function  FC  is a    gt  code block without
208. runtime at interrupt level must be added to this time extension     CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05 5 7    Cycle and reaction times       5 2 Cycle time    Extension of the cycle time due to error    Table 5 8 Cycle time extension as a result of errors                                  Type of error Programming errors I O access errors  312C 600 us 600 us  313C 400 us 400 us  313C2 400 us 400 us  314C 2 400 us 400 us  312 600 us 600 us  314 400 us 400 us  315 400 us 400 us  317 100 us 100 us             The interrupt OB processing time must be added to this extended time  The times required  for multiple nested interrupt error OBs are added accordingly     5 2 3 Different cycle times    Overview    The cycle time  Tcyc  length is not the same in every cycle  The figure below shows different  cycle times Teyct and Teyc2  Tcyc2 is longer than Tcyc1  because the cyclically executed OB1 is  interrupted by a time of day interrupt OB  here  OB 10      Current cycle    Toyet    Next cycle   Cycle after next  T cyc 2            Updating   Updating  PIO PII             OB1    Updating   Updating  CCP   PIO PII                   OB1            Block processing times may fluctuate  Fluctuation of the block processing time  e g  OB 1  may also be a factor causing cycle time    fluctuation  due to     e conditional instructions     e conditional block calls     e different program paths     e loops etc     OB10         Updating Updating    OB1 
209. rupt belongs to one of the priority classes in SIMATIC S7 program  processing  It is generated on expiration of a time started in the user program  A  corresponding OB will be processed     See Interrupt  delay    Interrupt  diagnostic  See Diagnostic Interrupt    Interrupt  process    See Process interrupt    Interrupt  status    A status interrupt can be generated by a DPV1 slave and causes OB 55 to be called on the  DPV1 master  For detailed information on OB 55  see the Reference Manual System  software for S7 300 400  System and Standard Functions     Interrupt  time of day    The time of day interrupt belongs to one of the priority classes in  SIMATIC S7 program processing  It is generated at a specific date  or daily  and time of day   e g  9 50 or hourly  or every minute   A corresponding OB will be processed     Interrupt  update    An update interrupt can be generated by a DPV1 slave and causes OB56 to be called on the  DPV1 master  For detailed information on OB56  see the Reference Manual System  software for S7 300 400  System and Standard Functions     Interrupt  vendor specific    A vendor specific interrupt can be generated by a DPV1 slave  It causes OB57 to be called  on the DPV1 master     For detailed information on OB 57  see the Reference Manual System Software for  S7 300 400  System and Standard Functions     IO controller  See PROFINET  O Controller  See PROFINET IO Device  See PROFINET  O Supervisor  See PROFINET IO System    CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Tec
210. s At every start of an OB1 cycle  the CPU reads the values at the  input of the input modules and saves them the process image of  inputs    Process image of outputs During its cycle  the program calculates the values for the outputs    and writes these to the process image of outputs  At the end of  the OB1 cycle  the CPU writes the calculated output values to the  output modules                 Flag bits This area provides memory for saving the intermediate results of  a program calculation    Timers Timers are available in this area    Counters Counters are available in this area    Local data Temporary data in a code block  OB  FB  FC  is saved to this    memory area while the block is being edited                 Data blocks See Recipes and measurement value logs       The address areas of your CPU are listed in the  nstruction list for CPUs 31xC and 31x     I O process image    When the user program addresses the input  I  and output  O  address areas  it does not  query the signal states of digital signal modules  Instead  it rather accesses a memory area  in CPU system memory  This particular memory area is the process image     The process image is organized in two sections  The process image of inputs  and the  process image of outputs     Advantages of the process image    Process image access  compared to direct I O access  offers the advantage that a consistent  image of process signals is made available to the CPU during cyclic program execution   When the signa
211. s a communication concept for the  implementation of modular  distributed applications     PROFINET IO allows you to create automation solutions  which are familiar to you from  PROFIBUS     That is  you have the same application view in STEP 7  regardless of whether you configure  PROFINET or PROFIBUS devices     PROFINET IO Controller    Device via which the connected IO devices are addressed  This means that the IO controller    exchanges input and output signals with assigned field devices  The IO controller is often the  controller on which the automation program runs     See PROFINET IO Device  See PROFINET  O Supervisor  See PROFINET IO System    PROFINET IO Device    Distributed field device assigned to one of the IO controllers  for example  remote I O  valve  terminal  frequency converter  switches     See PROFINET IO Controller  See PROFINET  O Supervisor  See PROFINET IO System    PROFINET IO Supervisor  PG PC or HMI device for commissioning and diagnostics   See PROFINET IO Controller  See PROFINET IO Device  See PROFINET IO System    PROFINET IO System  PROFINET IO controller with assigned PROFINET IO devices   See PROFINET IO Controller  See PROFINET IO Device    Programming device    Basically speaking  PGs are compact and portable PCs which are suitable for industrial  applications  Their distinguishing feature is the special hardware and software for SIMATIC  programmable logic controllers     CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Glossary 16 Manual  Edition
212. s portable storage medium        Note    These CPUs do not have an integrated load memory and thus require an MMC for    operation        CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05    Operating and display elements       2 1 Operating and display elements  CPU 31xC    Mode selector switch  Use the mode selector switch to set the CPU operating mode                       Table 2 1 Positions of the mode selector switch  Position Meaning Description  RUN RUN mode The CPU executes the user program   STOP STOP mode The CPU does not execute a user program   MRES CPU memory Mode selector switch position with pushbutton function for CPU  reset memory reset  A CPU memory reset by means of mode selector  switch requires a specific sequence of operation           Reference  e CPU operating modes  STEP 7 Online Help     e Information on CPU memory reset  Operating instructions CPU 31xC and CPU31x   Commissioning  Commissioning Modules  CPU Memory Reset by means of Mode  Selector Switch    e Evaluation of the LEDs upon error or diagnostic event  Operating Instructions CPU 31xC  and CPU 31x  Test Functions  Diagnostics and Troubleshooting  Diagnostics with the  help of Status and Error LEDs    Power supply connection    Each CPU is equipped with a double pole power supply socket  The connector with screw  terminals is inserted into this socket when the CPU is delivered     Differences between the CPUs                                              Table 2 2 
213. should merely be started in OB 82  The data should be  evaluated in the cyclical program  taking account of the BUSY bits and the value returned  in RET_VAL        Hint    If you are using a CPU 31xC 31x  we recommend that you use SFB 54  rather than SFC  13  DPNRM_DG      SFC 20  BLKMOV     In the past  this SFC could be used with CPUs 312 IFM to 318 2 DP to copy data from a non  runtime related DB     SFC 20 no longer has this functionality with CPUs 31xC 31x  SFC83  READ_DBL  is now  used instead     SFC 54  RD_DPARM     This SFC is no longer available on CPUs 31xC 31x  Use SFC 102  RD_DPARA  instead   which works asynchronously     CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05 A 3    Appendix       A 7 Information about upgrading to a CPU 31xC or CPU 31x    SFCs that may return other results  You can ignore the following points if you only use logical addressing in your user program     When using address conversion in your user program  SFC 5  GADR_LGC    SFC 49  LGC_GADR    you must check the assignment of the slot and logical start address  for your DP slaves     e Inthe past  the diagnostic address of a DP slave was assigned to the slave s virtual slot  2  Since DPV1 was standardized  this diagnostic address has been assigned to virtual  slot 0  station proxy  for CPUs 31xC 31x     e Ifthe slave has modeled a separate slot for the interface module  e g  CPU31x 2 DP as  an intelligent slave or IM 153   then its address is assigned to slo
214. sioning functions   5 2 6 Cycle extension through component based automation  CBA               eccceeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeees   5 3 RESPONSE TIME sss casees Seoiabcsas cae atedicenstwetect iE tea eal E A EAE AA T AEE  5 3 1 OWE VIGW iinoa a a a a aaa a ofaadadesapaueas aa aa aG  5 3 2 Shortest response time               ccccccceeeeeceecee cece ttt tt tett tttt EEEn ESENE EE EEEE ESENE EEE EEEE ENESENN EEEE EE Ennn nennen   5 3 3 L  ngesi response Umes a SEA   5 3 4 Reducing the response time with direct I O access   5 4 Calculating method for calculating the cycle response time                  c ceseeeecceeeeeeeeeeeeetenaeeeeees   5 5 Interrupt response TMC sa icscceticasccccasvedcetacdscecacadas dagaedveczebaane dace deccxtevagns dduavecddeesaaadadeanecdscasnanadacees  5 5 1 CVG IVICW E dacieen sei day A dancin du en tanta E Geicndeenaeeeszdee 4  5 5 2 Reproducibility of delay interrupts and watchdog interrupts                     cecceceeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeees   5 6 Sample CAICUIALIONS sesinin niian a anaa e a a aa sabadednapeeeestd  5 6 1 Example of cycle time calculation                  cccceceeeecceceeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeseeecacaeeeeeeesesecsusaeeeeeeeeetees  5 6 2 Sample of response time calculation                ccccceceeeecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesecaeaeeeeeeesesecsuaeeeeeeeees  5 6 3 Example of interrupt response time calculation   Technical data Of CPU 31XC            cccccccccecesssseeneeeeeeeeeeseceeeeeeeeeeeeesececeeeeeeeeeeessecccenseeeeeeeseeseseeaeeseesee
215. sseunaees   6 1 General technical data 2 nssr nanan a aai aa aa a aa aaa EA aa caida caudeacanatd  6 1 1 Dimensions of CPU  SUK oaea cabncaducaa devas tansina dpkaasecaetanesadeian    any duaanacaadesadandentncds  6 1 2 Technical data of the Micro Memory Card  MMC             ccccecsseceeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeeseeaeeeseenaees  6 2 CPUS I Oar reer rere rere entree Serre E recreate E cent rrer rere 6 3  Ss OPN aarti eee tee eee cei teeeteeneed  6 4 CPU 313C 2 PiP and CPU  3130 2 DP os ssscccihssccceiastvcetisusbceisledetassegiiauilcsravescriciaseeseaasttecdeed 6 14    CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05    Table of contents       6 5 CPU 314C 2 PtP and CPU 314C 2 DP    6 6 Technical data of the integrated VO  ecrire ina a  6 6 1 Arrangement and usage of integrated I Os  6 6 2 Analog YO necesis A a a E A E E  6 6 3 Configuration  6 6 4 Interrupts iesse oaa aa aaa a a aaa a aa aa adbaad  6 6 5 DIAQMOSUCS ea E E  6 6 6 Digital NPU escini E E EEE  6 6 7 Digital outputs  6 6 8 Analog InPuUlS os cece ie deeec an setae eienttcect E E E E E T EE  6 6 9 Analog outputs    7 Technical data of CPU 31x    7 1 General technical data saien a a a a A a A a E ia  7 1 1 DIMENSIONS OF CPW  SIR nenian A R EN A A E EE  7 1 2 Technical data of the Micro Memory Card  MMC                  7 2 CPW OA iaiia E E E e 7 3  7 3 CPUS TAi a e A E E A ames 7 8  7 4 CPWSIS ea  gree mere er teen A E E E te Tree meres 7 13  7 5 Oe ee at al  8   aarrerre ete E ee Oren er
216. t       Clock synchronization    Yes       e Inthe PLC    Master slave       e On MPI    Master slave       S7 signaling functions       Number of stations that can be logged on for  signaling functions    32     depends on the number of connections  configured for PG   OP and S7 basic  communication                 Process diagnostics messages Yes  e Simultaneously enabled interrupt S blocks 60  Testing and commissioning functions   Status control variables Yes       e Variables          Inputs  outputs  memory bits  DBs  timers   counters          CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05    7 35    Technical data of CPU 31x       7 7 CPU 317 2 PN DP    7 36       Technical data                            e Number of variables 30      Of those as status variable Max  30      Of those as control variable Max  14  Forcing  e Variables Inputs Outputs  e Number of variables Max  10  Block status Yes  Single step Yes  Breakpoints 2  Diagnostic buffer Yes  e Number of entries  not configurable  Max  100       Communication functions       Open IE communication via TCP IP    Yes  via integrated PROFINET interface and  loadable FBs  max  8 connections        PG OP communication                   Global data communication Yes   e Number of GD circuits 8   e Number of GD packets Max  8      Sending stations Max  8      Receiving stations Max  8   e Length of GD packets max  22 bytes      Consistent data 22 bytes   S7 basic communication Yes       e
217. t  That is  the process image of inputs is only updated up to the set PII size with  the corresponding values of the peripheral input modules existing within this address area   or the values of the process image of outputs up to the set PIO size are written to the  peripheral output modules existing within this address area     This set size of the process image is ignored with respect to STEP 7 commands used to  access the process image  for example U 1100 0  L EW200    Q20 0  T AD150  or  corresponding indirect addressing commands also   However  up to the maximum size of the  process image  that is  up to I O byte 2047   these commands do not return any  synchronous access errors  but rather access the permanently available internal memory  area of the process image    The same applies to the use of actual parameters of block calls from the I O area  area of  the process image      Particularly if these process image limits were changed  you should check to which extent  your user program accesses the process image in the area between the set and the  maximum process image size  If access to this area continues  the user program may not  detect changes at the inputs of the I O module  or actually fails to write the data of outputs to  the output module  without the system generating an error message    You should also note that certain CPs may only be addressed outside of the process image        CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 0
218. t 2     Activating   deactivating DP slaves via SFC 12    With CPUs 31xC 31x  slaves that were deactivated via SFC 12 are no longer automatically  activated at the RUN to STOP transition  Now they are not activated until they are restarted   STOP to RUN transition      A 1 3 Interrupt events from distributed I Os while the CPU status is in STOP    Interrupt events from distributed I Os while the CPU status is in STOP    With the new DPV1 functionality  IEC 61158  EN 50170  volume 2  PROFIBUS   the  handling of incoming interrupt events from the distributed I Os while the CPU status is in  STOP has also changed     Previous response by the CPU with STOP status    With CPUs 312IFM     318 2 DP  initially an interrupt event was noticed while the CPU was in  STOP mode  When the CPU status subsequently returned to RUN  the interrupt was then  fetched by an appropriate OB  e g  OB 82      New response by the CPU    With CPUs 31xC 31x  an interrupt event  process or diagnostic interrupt  new DPV1  interrupts  is acknowledged by the distributed I O while the CPU is still in STOP status  and  is entered in the diagnostic buffer if necessary  diagnostic interrupts only   When the CPU  status subsequently returns to RUN  the interrupt is no longer fetched by the OB  Possible  slave faults can be read using suitable SSL queries  e g  read SSL 0x692 via SFC51      CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  A 4 Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05    Appendix  A 1 Information about upgrading
219. t or its contents is not permitted without We have checked the contents of this manual for agreement with the hardware and  express written authority  Offenders will be liable for damages  All rights  including rights software described  Since deviations cannot be precluded entirely  we cannot guarantee  created by patent grant or registration of a utility model or design  are reserved  full agreement  However  the data in the manual are reviewed regularly  and any    necessary corrections will be included in subsequent editions  Suggestions for  improvement are welcomed     Siemens AG  Automation and Drives Group Siemens AG 2004  P O  Box 4848  D 90327 Nuremberg  Germany  Technical data subject to change    Siemens Aktiengesellschaft Order No  A5E00105475 05    Preface    Purpose of the Manual    This manual contains all the information you will need concerning the configuration    communication  memory concept  cycle  response times and technical data for the CPUs   You will then learn the points to consider when upgrading to one of the CPUs discussed in  this manual     Required basic knowledge    Area of application    To understand this manual  you require a general knowledge of automation engineering     You should also be accustomed to working with STEP 7 basic software                                                                             Table 1 1 Application area covered by this manual  CPU Convention  Order number as of version  CPU designations  Firmware   Ha
220. t reaction time of the CPU      Minimum interrupt reaction time of the   Maximum interrupt reaction time of the signal  signal modules modules     PROFINET IO update time  only if   2 x PROFINET IO update time  only if PROFINET  PROFINET IO is used   IO is used       DP cycle time on PROFIBUS DP  only if   2 x DP cycle time on PROFIBUS DP  only if  PROFIBUS DP is used   PROFIBUS DP is used       Quickest interrupt reaction time The maximum interrupt reaction time is longer when    the communication functions are active  The extra  time is calculated using the following formula    tv  200 us   1000 us x n    n   Setting of the cycle load as a result of  communication                Extension of interrupt response times with cyclic PROFINET interconnections    Signal modules    5 22    When using cyclical PROFINET interconnections to a remote partner  the interrupt response  time can increase by up to 1 2 ms in addition to the values mentioned above     e More than 10 cyclical interconnections are configured to the remote partner or    e The interconnection data to the remote partner are greater than 100 bytes     The process interrupt response time of signal modules is determined by the following factors   e Digital input modules   Process interrupt response time   internal interrupt preparation time   input delay   You will find these times in the data sheet for the respective digital input module   e Analog input modules   Process interrupt response time   internal interrupt
221. t transmits a request to connect to communication  partner B  Communication partner B waits until it receives the request for a passive    connection     In your connection configuration  you define which communication partner activates the  connection  and which communication partners respond to the request with a passive    connection     Both communication partners must have established their connection in order to be able to    exchange data     Data exchange    Bidirectional data exchange is enabled after you established communication  that is  data  can be transmitted and received in parallel  FBs available for data exchange        Name of the FB  FB 63  TSEND     Description  Transmit data          FB 64  TRCV        Receive data          You can transmit and receive up to 1460 bytes of user data     Disconnecting    FB 66  TDISCON  disconnects the CPU from a communication partner     Communication interruptions    Events causing interruptions of communication     e You program the cancellation of connections at FB 66  TDISCON      e The CPU goes from RUN to STOP   e At POWER OFF   POWER ON    Reference    For detailed information on the blocks described earlier  refer to the STEP 7 Online Help     CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05    3 25    Communication  3 3 S7 connections       3 2 10 5 SNMP communication service    Availability  The SNMP communication service is available for CPUs with integrated PROFINET  interface and 
222. ta transmission rates are required  In a coaxial cable  an  inner conductor is surrounded by an outer tube like conductor  The two conductors are  separated by a dielectric layer  In contrast to other cables  this design provides a high  degree of immunity to and low emission of electromagnetic interference     A SIMATIC S7 code block contains part of the STEP 7 user program   in contrast to a DB   this contains only data      Communication processor    Communications processors are modules for point to point and bus links     Component Based automation    Glossary 2    See PROFINET CBA    CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05    Glossary       Compress    Configuration    Consistent data    Counters    CP    CPU    Cycle time    Cyclic interrupt    Data block    Data  static    The PG online function  Compress  is used to rearrange all valid blocks in CPU RAM in one  continuous area of user memory  starting at the lowest address  This eliminates  fragmentation which occurs when blocks are deleted or edited     Assignment of modules to module racks slots and  e g  for signal modules  addresses     Data which are related in their contents and not to be separated are referred to as consistent  data     For example  the values of analog modules must always be handled consistently  that is  the  value of an analog module must not be corrupted as a result of read access at two different  points of time     Counters are part of CPU system mem
223. terrupt input DI  0 7       Byte0  7                                    Byte 1  7 Bit Nr        10    Interrupt input DI  1 0  Interrupt input DI  1 1  Interrupt input DI  1 7                                  Byte2  7 Bit Nr               Interrupt input DI  2 0  nterrupt input DI  2 1  Interrupt input DI  2 7 0  deactivated  1  rising edge  Default setting           Byte 3 reserved                                     Byte 4 ik O  Bit Nr       Interrupt input DI  0 0    Interrupt input DI  0 1  Interrupt input                                     Byte5  7 O  Bit Nr     Interrupt input DI  1 0    Interrupt input DI  1 1  Interrupt input DI  1 7                                                                Byte6  7 Bit Nr   Interrupt input DI  2 0  Interrupt input DI  2 1  Interrupt input DI  2 7 0  deactivated  ils rising edge  Default setting   Byte 7 reserved  Byte 8 i QO  Bit Nr     S603 a a          Input delay DI  0 0 to DI  0 3  Input delay DI  0 4 to DI  0 7  Input delay DI  1 0 to DI  1 3    Input delay DI  1 4 to DI  1 7                            Byte 9 7 0  Bit Nr   SS See          Input delay DI  2 0 to DI  2 3  Input delay DI  2 4 to DI  2 7          reserved 00B  3 ms  01B  0 1 ms  10B  0 5 ms  11g  15 ms  Default setting  00B    Figure 6 7 Structure of record 1 for standard DI and interrupt inputs  length of 10 bytes     CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  6 40 Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05    Technical data of CPU 31xC       Parameters of standard D
224. the  interface    Yes       e The interface can trigger a break or  an interrupt in the user program    Yes  message with break ID        e Protocol driver    3964  R   ASCII and RK512       Programming    CPU 314C 2 PtP       CPU 314C 2 DP       Programming language    LAD FBD STL       Available instructions    see the Instruction List       Nesting levels    8       System functions  SFCs     see the Instruction List       System function blocks  SFBs     see the Instruction List       User program security    Yes       Integrated I O    CPU 314C 2 PtP    CPU 314C 2 DP          e Default addresses of the integrated      Digital inputs      Digital outputs      Analog inputs      Analog outputs          124 0 to 126 7  124 0 to 125 7  752 to 761  752 to 755          6 26    CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05    Technical data of CPU 31xC  6 5 CPU 314C 2 PtP and CPU 314C 2 DP                                                                            Technical data   CPU 314C 2 PtP CPU 314C 2 DP  Integrated functions  Counters 4 channels  see the Manual 7echno logical Functions   Frequency counters 4 channels  max  60 kHz  see the Manual 7echnological Functions   Pulse outputs 4 channels for pulse width modulation  max  2 5 kHz  see the Manual   Technological Functions   Controlled positioning 1 channel  see the Manual Technological Functions   Integrated  Controlling  SFB PID controller  see the Manual 7echnological Functions   Dime
225. the DB should    receive the initial values retain the actual values  retentive DB    non retentive DB        Background  Background     At POWER ON OFF and restart  STOP  At POWER OFF ON and restart  STOP RUN  of the  RUN  of the CPU  the actual values of the CPU  the actual values of the DB are retained    DB are non retentive  The DB receives the  start values from load memory        Requirement in STEP 7  Requirement in STEP 7   e The  Non retain  check box must be set  e The  Non retain  check box must be reset in the  in the block properties of the DB  or block properties of the DB or    e anon retentive DB was generated with  e a retentive DB was generated with SFC 82   SFC 82  CREA_DBL  and the  corresponding block attribute  ATTRIB     gt  NON_RETAIN bit                     Note    Note that only 256 KB of RAM can be used for retentive data blocks on a CPU 317  The  remainder of the RAM is used by code blocks and non retentive data blocks        CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  4 4 Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05    Memory concept       4 1 4    4 1 Memory areas and retentivity    Address areas of system memory    System memory of the S7 CPUS is organized in address areas  refer to the table below   In  a corresponding operation of your user program  you address data directly in the relevant  address area     Address areas of system memory    Reference    Table 4 4 Address areas of system memory          Address areas Description   Process image of input
226. tion  In this case  you may have to delete the MMC on  your PG  or format the card in the CPU  Never remove an MMC in RUN mode  Always  remove it when power is off  or when the CPU is in STOP state  and when the PG is not  a writing to the card  When the CPU is in STOP mode and you cannot not determine  whether or not a PG is writing to the card  e g  load delete block   disconnect the  communication lines     CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  4 16 Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05    Memory concept  4 2 Memory functions       4 2 6 Measured value log files    Introduction  Measured values are generated when the CPU executes the user program  These values  are to be logged and analyzed     Processing sequence  Acquisition of measured values   e The CPU writes all measured values to a DB  for alternating backup mode in several  DBs  which is located in RAM   Measured value logging     e Before the data volume can exceed work memory capacity  you should call  SFC 84  WRIT_DBL  in the user program to swap measured values from the DB to load  memory  The figure below shows how to handle measured value log files     Loading memory     MMC   Working memory    Measured values 1 A SFC 82 CREA_DBL a   CPU     Measured values 2 Current measured  values  i  lt q      _ SFC 84 WRIT_DBL    Measured values n                                        e You can call SFC 82  CREA_DBL  in the user program to generate new  additional  static  DBs in load memory which do not require RAM s
227. tion List   e Length 16 KB   Nesting depth   e Per priority class 8   e additional within an error OB 4   FBs See the Instruction List   e Number 2048   FB 0 to FB 2047    e Length 16 KB   FCs See the Instruction List   e Number 2048   FC 0 to FC 2047    e Length 16 KB       Address areas  I O        Total I O address area    max  2048 bytes 2048 bytes   can be freely addressed                          Distributed max  2000 bytes  I O process image 128 128   Digital channels 16384 16384   of those local Max  1024  Analog channels 1024 1024   of those local Max  256             CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05    Technical data of CPU 31x       7 5 CPU 315 2 PN DP       Technical data                                  Assembly   Racks Max  4  Modules per rack 8  Number of DP masters   e Integrated 1   e viaCP 2  Number of function modules and communication processors you can operate  e FM Max  8  e CP  PtP  Max  8  e CP  LAN  Max  10  Time of day       Real time clock    Yes  hardware clock        Factory setting    DT 1994 01 01 00 00 00       Buffered    Yes       Buffered period    Typically 6 weeks  at an ambient temperature of  104   F        Behavior of the clock on expiration of the  buffered period    The clock keeps running  continuing at the time   of day it had when power was switched off        Behavior of the realtime clock after POWER  ON    The clock continues running after POWER OFF        Accuracy    Deviation per da
228. tion service  e g   S7 communication  OP communication  etc     Example for a CPU 317 2 PN DP  The CPU 317 2 PN DP provides 32 connection resources   e Reserve four connection resources for PG communication   e Reserve six connection resources for OP communication   e Reserve two connection resources for S7 based communication     e In NetPro you configure eight S7 connection resources for S7 communication via the  integrated PROFINET interface    This leaves 12 S7 connections available for any communication service  e g    S7 communication  OP communication  etc  However  only a maximum of 16 connection  resources can be configured for S7 communication at the integrated PN interface in NetPro   In addition  24 routing connections are available that do not affect the S7 connection  resources mentioned above     CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05 3 31    Communication       3 4 DPV1    3 4 DPV 1    Definition DPV1    Availability    New automation and process engineering tasks require the range of functions performed by  the existing DP protocol to be extended  In addition to cyclical communication functions   acyclical access to non S7 field devices is another important requirement of our customers   and was implemented in the standard EN 50170  In the past  acyclical access was only  possible with S7 slaves  The distributed I O standard EN 50170 has been further developed   All the changes concerning new DPV1 functions are included 
229. tion via PROFINET interface  system load  SFC call  update at scan  cycle check point     e PROFINET IO communication via PROFINET interface  system load     CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05    Cycle and reaction times       5 2 Cycle time    5 2 2 Calculating the cycle time    Introduction  The cycle time is derived from the sum of the following influencing factors     Process image update    The table below shows the time a CPU requires to update the process image  process  image transfer time   The times specified might be prolonged as a result of interrupts or CPU  communication  The process image transfer time is calculated as follows     Table 5 2 Formula for calculating the process image  PI  transfer time       The transfer time of the process image is calculated as follows        Base load K     number of bytes in PI in module rack 0 x  A     number of bytes in PO in module rack 1 to 3 x  B     number of words in PO via DP x  D     number of words in PO via PROFINET x  P     Transfer time for the process image             Table 5 3 CPU 31xC  Data for calculating the process image  PI  transfer time                                     Const  Portions CPU CPU CPU CPU CPU CPU  312C 313C 313C 2   313C 2   314C 2   314C 2  DP PtP DP PtP  K Base load 150 us  100us   100 us 100 us  A per byte in module rack 0   37 us 35 us 37 us 37 us  B per byte in module   43 us 47 us 47 us  racks 1 to 3    D per WORD in the DP area       1 us 
230. tionality   CPU 317 2 PN DP     PROFIBUS    PROFIBUS device 1      PROFIBUS device 16     as DP slave   as DP slave  Quantity  16             The upper graphic displays Number   Incoming outgoing remote connections   Cyclical interconnection via Ethernet 200  scan cycle rate  Intervals of  10 ms   Acyclic interconnection via Ethernet 50  scan cycle rate  Intervals of  500 ms   Interconnections from the PROFINET device with proxy 16x4    functionality  CPU 317 2 PN DP  to the PROFIBUS devices   Interconnections of PROFIBUS devices among each other 16x6                CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05       Cycle and reaction times  5 2 Cycle time       Additional marginal conditions    The maximum cycle load through communication in the measurement is 20       The lower graphic shows that the OB1 cycle is influenced by increasing the cyclical  PROFINET interconnections to remote partners at PROFINET     Dependency of the OB1 cycle on the number of interconnections    Cycle time in ms         OB1 cycle with 32 remote  PROFINET partners            OB1 cycle with 5 remote  PROFINET partners                0 32 64 96 128 160 200    Number of interconnections    Base load through PROFIBUS devices    The 16 PROFIBUS devices with their interconnections among each other generate an  additional base load of up to 1 0 ms     Tips and notes    The upper graphic already includes the use of uniform values for the transfer frequency of all  interc
231. tions    Memory functions are used to generate  modify or delete entire user programs or specific  blocks  You can also ensure that your project data are retained by archiving these  If there    is    You created a new user program  use a PG  PC to download the complete program to  MMC     4 2 2 Loading user program from Micro Memory Card  MMC  to the CPU    User program download    All user program data are downloaded from your PG PC to the CPU via MMC  The previous  content of the MMC is deleted in the process  Blocks use the load memory area as specified  under  Load memory requirements  in  General block properties      The figure shows the load and work memory of the CPU    CPU  PG                                                                                  Stored on Loading memory Working memory  hard disk  Code modules Code modules Process relevant    eer er parts of the code  Sw ee  ee and data modules    Data modules Data modules    Comments se Se  Symbols            If not all of the work memory area is retentive  its retentive area is indicated in the STEP 7  module status as retentive memory  same as on CPU 317   You cannot run the program  until all the blocks are downloaded     CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05 4 11    Memory concept  4 2 Memory functions          Note    This function is only permitted when the CPU is in STOP mode  Load memory is cleared if  the load operation could not be completed due to power l
232. tions None 8  Functionality   e MPI No No   e PROFIBUS DP No Yes   e Point to point communication Yes No   DP master   Number of connections   8  Services   e PG OP communication   Yes   e Routing   Yes   e Global data communication   No   e S7 basic communication   No   e S7 communication   No   e Constant bus cycle time   Yes   e SYNC FREEZE   Yes   e Enable disable DP slaves   Yes   e DPV1   Yes   e Transmission rates   Up to 12 Mbps  e Number of DP slaves per station   Max  32       e Address area    Max  1 KB1 1KBO          e User data per DP slave             Max  244 bytes     244 bytes O       6 18    CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05    Technical data of CPU 31xC       6 4 CPU 313C 2 PtP and CPU 313C 2 DP       Technical data       CPU 313C 2 PtP    CPU 313C 2 DP             DP slave   Number of connections   8  Services   e PG OP communication     Yes                   e Routing   Yes  only if interface is active   e Global data communication   No   e S7 basic communication   No   e S7 communication   No   e Direct data exchange   Yes       Transmission rates    Up to 12 Mbps       Automatic baud rate search    Yes  only if interface is passive        Intermediate memory    244 bytes     244 bytes O       Address areas    Max  32  with max  32 bytes each       DPV1    No       GSD file    http   www ad siemens de support    The latest GSD file is available at     in the Product Support area       Point to point communicati
233. to 1      20 mA   0    20 mA   4    20 mA       10 V   0   10 V  Type of output Disabled  U voltage Channel   channel 0 to 1  V voltage     current                      CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  6 42 Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05    Technical data of CPU 31xC  6 6 Technical data of the integrated I O                               Byte0  7   0  Bit Nr   ee Ne ee ee ee  reserved       Unit of measure                         00g  Celsius  01g  Fahrenheit  10g  Kelvin  reserved Default setting  00B  Byte1  7  o  Bit Nr   e a a a a       Parasitic frequency suppression integration time of channel Al 0  Parasitic frequency suppression integration time of channel Al 1  Parasitic frequency suppression integration time of channel Al 2  Parasitic frequency suppression integration time of channel Al 3  00B  2 5 ms  400 Hz  01g  16 6 ms  60 Hz  10B  20 ms  50 Hz                                  Default setting  10B  Byte 2  0 Bitno   Byte3  7 Lo  Bit Nr         _      _       a aM          Measuring range of channel Al 0  settings see byte 6   Measurement type of channel Al 0  settings see byte 6                                Byte4 Zz O  Bit Nr   eee         Measuring range of channel Al 1  settings see byte 6   Measurement type of channel Al 1  settings see byte 6                                        Measuring range of channel Al 2  settings see byte 6   Measurement type of channel Al 2  settings see byte 6                             Byte 6  7    0  Bit Nr   au
234. to output range   0 15    Repeat accuracy  in transient state at 25   C  in relation to output range    0 06    Output ripple  bandwidth 0 to 50 kHz  in relation to output range   0 1        Status  interrupts  diagnostics       Interrupts    e no interrupts when operated as standard  VO    e For using technological functions  please  refer to the 7echnological Functions  Manual        Diagnostics functions    e no diagnostics when operated as  standard   O    e For using technological functions  please  refer to the 7echnological Functions  Manual        Actuator selection data       Output range  rated values                          e Voltage  10V  OV to10V  e Current  20mA  0 mA to 20 mA  4 mA to 20 mA  Load resistance  within output rating   e For voltage outputs min  1 KQ      Capacitive load max  0 1 uF  e For current outputs max  300 Q      Inductive load 0 1 mH       6 54    CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05       Technical data of CPU 31xC  6 6 Technical data of the integrated I O          Technical data    Voltage output                         e Short circuit protection Yes   e   Short circuit current Typically 55 mA  Current output   e No load voltage Typically 17 V  Destruction limit for externally applied voltages currents   e Voltage measured between the outputs and Mana Max  16 V   e Current Max  50 mA        Connection of actuators       e For voltage outputs        wire connection Possible  without compensation of
235. u can also use SFC 14  and SFC 15     If the address area of  consistent data is not in the  process image  you must use  SFC 14 and SFC 15 to read  and write consistent data     Direct access to consistent    areas is also possible  for  example  L PEW or T PAW            CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05    Appendix       A 7 Information about upgrading to a CPU 31xC or CPU 31x    A 1 9 Load memory concept for the CPU 31xC 31x    Load memory concept for the CPU 31xC 31x    On CPUs 312 IFM to 318 2 DP  the load memory is integrated into the CPU and may be  extended with a memory card     The load memory of the CPU 31xC 31x is located on the micro memory card  MMC   and is  retentive  When blocks are downloaded to the CPU  they are stored on the MMC and cannot  be lost even in the event of a power failure or memory reset     Reference    See also the Memory concept chapter in the CPU Data 31xC and 31x manual        Note    User programs can only be downloaded and thus the CPU can only be used if the MMC is  inserted        A 1 10 PG OP functions    PG OP functions    With CPUs 315 2 DP  6ES7315 2AFx3 0ABO   316 2DP and 318 2 DP  PG OP functions at  the DP interface were only possible if the interface was set to active  With CPUs 31xC 31x   these functions are possible at both active and passive interfaces  The performance of the  passive interface is considerably lower  however     A 1 11 Routing for the CPU 31xC 31x as an intellige
236. ual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05    Technical data of CPU 31xC       6 2 CPU 312C    6 2 CPU 312C    Technical data    Table 6 3 Technical data of CPU 312C       Technical data  CPU and version                Order number 6ES7 312 5BD01 0ABO   e Hardware version 01   e Firmware version V2 0   e Associated programming package STEP 7 as of V5 2   SP 1   please use previous CPU for STEP 7 V 5 1    SP 3 or later                          Memory   RAM   e Integrated 16 KB   e Expandable No   Load memory Plugged in with MMC  max  4 MB   Data storage life on the MMC At least 10 years     following final programming        Buffering Guaranteed by MMC  maintenance free        Execution times       Processing times of                e Bit operations Min  0 2 us  e Word instructions Min  0 4 us  e Fixed point arithmetic Min  5 us  e Floating point arithmetic Min  6 us       Timers counters and their retentivity                                              S7 counters 128   e Retentive memory Configurable   e Default from CO to C7   e Counting range 0 to 999   IEC Counters Yes   e Type SFB   e Number unlimited  limited only by RAM size   S7 timers 128   e Retentive memory Configurable   e Default Not retentive   e Timer range 10 ms to 9990 s       CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05 6 3    Technical data of CPU 31xC       6 2 CPU 312C       Technical data          IEC Timers Yes  e Type SFB  e Number unlimited  limited only by RAM size        
237. uding all program sections and system activities interrupting this  cycle  This time is monitored     Time slice model    Cyclic program processing  and therefore user program execution  is based on time shares   To clarify these processes  let us assume that every time share has a length of precisely  1 ms     Process image    During cyclic program processing  the CPU requires a consistent image of the process  signals  To ensure this  the process signals are read written prior to program execution   Subsequently  the CPU does not address input  I  and output  Q  address areas directly at  the signal modules  but rather accesses the system memory area containing the I O process  image     CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  5 2 Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05    Cycle and reaction times                5 2 Cycle time  Sequence of cyclic program processing  The table and figure below show the phases in cyclic program processing   Table 5 1 Cyclic program processing  Step Sequence  1 The operating system initiates cycle time monitoring   2 The CPU copies the values of the process image of outputs to the output modules   3 The CPU reads the status at the inputs of the input modules and then updates the    process image of inputs   The CPU processes the user program in time shares and executes program instructions                 5 At the end of a cycle  the operating system executes queued tasks  for example  loading  and deleting blocks   6 The CPU then returns to the
238. ue from the table below       Multiply both values by the CPU specific extension factor of the user program processing    time       Add the value of the interrupt processing program sequences to the theoretical cycle    time  multiplied by the number of triggering  or expected  interrupt events within the cycle  time  The result is an approximation of the physical cycle time  Note down the result     Cycle extension through component based automation  CBA   Page 5 11     CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05 5 19    Cycle and reaction times  5 4 Calculating method for calculating the cycle response time       Response time    Table 5 12 Calculating the response time                      Shortest response time Longest response time     Multiply the physical cycle time by factor 2    Now add I O delay  Now add the I O delay plus the DP cycle times on  PROFIBUS DP or the PROFINET IO update  times    The result is the shortest response time  The result is the longest response time        See also        Longest response time  Pag    Shortest response time  Pag    Cycle extension through component based automation  CBA   Page 5 11     CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  5 20 Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05    Cycle and reaction times       5 5 Interrupt response time    5 5 Interrupt response time    5 5 1 Overview    Definition of interrupt response time    The interrupt response time is the time that expires between the first oc
239. ultaneously enabled interrupt S  blocks    Max  20       Testing and commissioning functions       CPU 313C 2 PtP CPU 313C 2 DP       Status control variables    Yes       e Variables    Inputs  outputs  memory bits  DBs  timers  counters          e Number of variables Max  30      Of those as status variable Max  30      Of those as control variable Max  14   Forcing Yes       e Variables    Inputs  outputs                               e Number of variables Max  10  Block status Yes  Single step Yes  Breakpoints 2  Diagnostic buffer Yes   e Number of entries  not configurable  Max  100       6 16    CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05    Technical data of CPU 31xC       6 4 CPU 313C 2 PtP and CPU 313C 2 DP       Technical data       Communication functions    CPU 313C 2 PtP  CPU 313C 2 PtP    CPU 313C 2 DP  CPU 313C 2 DP                   PG OP communication Yes   Global data communication Yes   e Number of GD circuits 4   e Number of GD packets Max  4      Sending stations Max  4      Receiving stations Max  4   e Length of GD packets max  22 bytes      Consistent data 22 bytes       S7 basic communication    Yes  server        e User data per request      Consistent data    max  76 bytes  76 bytes  for X_SEND or X_RCV   64 bytes  for X_PUT or X_GET as the server        S7 communication       e As server    Yes       e asclient    Yes  via CP and loadable FBs        e User data per request    max  180 bytes  with PUT GET           
240. unctions   Dimensions CPU 313C 2 PtP CPU 313C 2 DP   Mounting dimensions W x H x D  mm  120 x 125 x 130   Weight approx  566 g   Voltages and currents CPU 313C 2 PtP CPU 313C 2 DP   Power supply  rated value  24 VDC   e Permitted range 20 4 V to 28 8 V   Current consumption  no load operation    Typically 100 mA   Inrush current Typically 11 A   Power consumption  nominal value  700 mA 900 mA   12t 0 7 A s   External fusing of power supply lines LS switch type B  min  4 A  type C  min  2 A    recommended    Power loss Typically 10 W  Reference    In Chapter Specifications of the integrated I O are found    e under Digital inputs of CPUs 31xC and Digital outputs of CPUs 31xC the technical data of  integrated I Os     e the block diagrams of the integrated I Os under Arrangement and usage of integrated  I Os     CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  6 20 Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05    Technical data of CPU 31xC       6 5    Technical data    Table 6 6    6 5 CPU 314C 2 PtP and CPU 314C 2 DP    CPU 314C 2 PtP and CPU 314C 2 DP    Technical data of CPU 314C 2 PtP and CPU 314C 2 DP       Technical data       CPU and version    CPU 314C 2 PtP  CPU 314C 2 PtP    CPU 314C 2 DP  CPU 314C 2 DP       Order number    6ES7 314 6BF01 0ABO    6ES7 314 6CF01 0ABO       e Hardware version    01    01       e Firmware version    V2 0 0    V2 0 0       Associated programming package    STEP 7 as of V 5 2   SP 1     please use previous CPU for STEP 7  V 5 1   SP 3 or later     STEP 7
241. urable  Max  100  Communication functions  PG OP communication Yes  Global data communication Yes  e Number of GD circuits 8  e Number of GD packets Max  8      Sending stations Max  8      Receiving stations Max  8  e Length of GD packets max  22 bytes      Consistent data 22 bytes  S7 basic communication Yes       e User data per request      Consistent data    max  76 bytes  76 bytes  for X_SEND or X_RCV   76 bytes  for X_PUT or X_GET as the server        S7 communication    Yes       e As server    Yes       e as client    Yes  via CP and loadable FBs        e User data per request      Consistent data    Max  180 bytes  with PUT GET   160 byte  as the server            5 compatible communication       Yes  via CP and loadable FCs           CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05    7 29    Technical data of CPU 31x       7 6 CPU 317 2 DP    7 30       Technical data                      Number of connections 32  can be used for  e PG communication Max  31      Reserved  default  4      Configurable 1 to 31  e OP communication Max  31      Reserved  default  1      Configurable 1 to 31  e S7 based communication Max  30      Reserved  default  0      Configurable 0 to 30  Routing Yes  max  8   Interfaces       1st interface       Type of interface    Integrated RS485 interface                                                                                  Physics RS 485  electrically isolated Yes  Interface power supply max  200 mA   
242. urces to OCMS services    An online function of the OCM station  OP TP     with Pro7oo  allocates S7 connection  resources for OP communication     e An S7 connection resource for OP communication you have reserved in your CPU  hardware configuration is therefore assigned to the OCM station engineering station  that  is  it only needs to be allocated     e If all reserved S7 connection resources for OP communication are allocated  the  operating system automatically assigns a free S7 connection resource which has not yet  been reserved  If no more connection resources are available  the OCM station cannot go  online to the CPU     Time sequence for allocation of S7 connection resources  When you program your project in STEP 7  the system generates parameter assignment  blocks which are read by the modules in the startup phase  This allows the module s  operating system to reserve or allocate the relevant S7 connection resources  That is  for  instance  OPs cannot access a reserved S7 connection resource for PG communication   The CPU s S7 connection resources which were not reserved can be used freely  These  S7 connection resources are allocated in the order they are requested     Example  If there is only one free S7 connection left on the CPU  you can still connect a PG to the bus   The PG can then communicate with the CPU  The S7 connection is only used  however   when the PG is communicating with the CPU  If you connect an OP to the bus while the PG  is not communicating
243. ve an integrated load memory and thus require an MMC for  operation        Mode selector switch    Use the mode selector switch to set the CPU operating mode     Table 2 5 Positions of the mode selector switch                   Position Meaning Description   RUN RUN mode The CPU executes the user program    STOP STOP mode The CPU does not execute a user program    MRES CPU memory reset   Mode selector switch position with pushbutton function for CPU  memory reset  A CPU memory reset by means of mode selector  switch requires a specific sequence of operation           Reference  e CPU operating modes  STEP 7 Online Help     e Information on CPU memory reset  Operating instructions CPU 31xC and CPU3 1x   Commissioning  Commissioning Modules  CP Memory Reset by means of Mode Selector  Switch    e Evaluation of the LEDs upon error or diagnostic event  Operating Instructions CPU 31xC  and CPU 31x  Test Functions  Diagnostics and Troubleshooting  Diagnostics with the  help of Status and Error LEDs    Power supply connection    Each CPU is equipped with a double pole power supply socket  The connector with screw  terminals is inserted into this socket when the CPU is delivered     CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  2 10 Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05       Operating and display elements  2 2 Operating and display elements  CPU 31x       2 2 4 Status and error displays of the CPU 31x    General status and error displays    Table 2 6 General status and error displays of th
244. version       Order number    6ES7317 2AJ10 0ABO       e Hardware version    01       e Firmware version    V 2 1 0       e Associated programming package    STEP 7 as of V5 2   SP 1                   data blocks    Memory   RAM   e Integrated 512 KB   e Expandable No   Capacity of the retentive memory for retentive max  256 KB       Load memory    Plugged in with MMC  max  8 MB        Buffering    Guaranteed by MMC  maintenance free        Data storage life on the MMC   following final programming     At least 10 years       Execution times       Processing times of                         e Bit operations 0 05 us  e Word instructions 0 2 us  e Fixed point arithmetic 0 2 us  e Floating point arithmetic 1 0 us       7 26    CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05       Technical data of CPU 31x       7 6 CPU 317 2 DP       Technical data    Timers counters and their retentivity                                              S7 counters 512   e Retentive memory Configurable   e Default from CO to C7   e Counting range 0 to 999   IEC Counters Yes   e Type SFB   e Number Unlimited   limited only by RAM size    S7 timers 512   e Retentive memory Configurable   e Default Not retentive   e Timer range 10 ms to 9990 s   IEC Timers Yes   e Type SFB   e Number Unlimited     limited only by RAM size        Data areas and their retentivity                                     Flag bits 4096 bytes  e Retentive memory Configurable  e Default retentivity 
245. y   lt  10s       Operating hours counter    1                e Number 0  e Value range 2 31 hours   if SFC 101 is used   e Granularity 1 hour  e Retentive yes  must be manually restarted after every    restart       Clock synchronization    Yes       In the PLC    Master slave       On MPI    Master slave       S7 signaling functions       Number of stations that can be logged on for  signaling functions    16     depends on the number of connections  configured for PG   OP and S7 basic  communication                 Process diagnostics messages Yes  e Simultaneously enabled interrupt S blocks 40  Testing and commissioning functions   Status control variables Yes          Variables       Inputs  outputs  memory bits  DBs  timers   counters          CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05    7 21    Technical data of CPU 31x       7 5 CPU 315 2 PN DP    7 22       Technical data                            e Number of variables 30      Of those as status variable Max  30      Of those as control variable Max  14  Forcing  e Variables Inputs Outputs  e Number of variables Max  10  Block status Yes  Single step Yes  Breakpoints 2  Diagnostic buffer Yes  e Number of entries  not configurable  Max  100       Communication functions       Open IE communication via TCP IP    Yes  via integrated PROFINET interface and  loadable FBs  max  8 connections                       PG OP communication Yes   Global data communication Yes   e Number of GD c
246. y  protective  measures and grounding    Module Data Manual       Under what conditions do   have to isolate the modules  electrically     How do   wire that      7 300  CPU 31xC and CPU 31x operating instructions   Installation  Configuring     Electrical assembly  protective  measures and grounding   CPU 31xC and CPU 31x operating instructions  Installation   Wiring       Under which conditions do   have to isolate stations  electrically        How do   wire that         7 300  CPU 31xC and CPU 31x operating instructions   Installation   Configuring     Configuring subnets          CPU 31xC and CPU 31x  Technical data  Manual  Edition 08 2004  A5E00105475 05    1 1    Guide to the S7 300 documentation       Table 1 3    Communication between sensors actuators and the PLC       Information on      Which module is suitable for my sensor actuator     is available in      For CPU  CPU 31xC and CPU 31x Manual  Technical Data    For signal modules  Reference manual of your signal  module       How many sensors actuators can   connect to the module     For CPU  CPU 31xC and CPU 31x Manual  technical data  of signal modules  Reference manual of your signal module       To connect my sensors actuators to the PLC  how do   wire  the front connector       7 300  CPU 31xC and CPU 31x operating instructions   Installation  Wiring     Wiring the front connector       When do   need expansion modules  EM  and how do    connect them      7 300  CPU 31xC and CPU 31x operating instructions  
    
Download Pdf Manuals
 
 
    
Related Search
    
Related Contents
Système de management de la Qualité : Mode d`emploi et exemples    Dicota Racer  Manuale di Installazione    Page 1 Page 2 Page 3 この度は “ヒロカル (B S ~~。 2) " を御購人賜り  Télécharger le dossier de presse  Shark NV480 Owner's Guide  Philips HX9014  KRONE - Breeze24.com    Copyright © All rights reserved. 
   Failed to retrieve file